"You
know, Ran Rarak, that the universe is composed of great clusters of suns,
separated from each other by billions of light-years of space, and that our own
sun is situated at the very edge of our Galaxy. Beyond He
inconceivable depths of space never crossed by 'the ships of the Federation
fleet or by anything else.
"Three
weeks ago, however, our astronomers discovered that a gigantic dark star is
approaching from that realm of infinite space, racing toward our Galaxy at an
inconceivable velocity. Their calculations showed that it would speed past our
Galaxy's edge, no closer than some fifteen billion miles. There was no possibility
of danger from it, therefore.
"But
during these last weeks the star's path has changed, and it is now curving
inward toward our Galaxy. It will now pass our own sun at a distance of less
than three billion miles—and when this titanic dead sun passes so close to us
there can be but one result: inevitably our own sun will be caught by the
powerful gravitational grip of the dark star and carried out with all its
planets into the depths of infinite space, never to return!"
EDMOND HAMILTON, who wrote the series of colossal
space adventures making up CRASHING SUNS, was the guest of honor at the 1964
World Science Fiction Convention (an honor he shared with his wife, Leigh
Brackett). It was a just tribute by readers and fellow professionals to his
standing in the field both past and present.
The Interstellar Patrol of the Federated Suns
is a creation of what might be termed Hamilton's "classic" years, the
period between 1926 and 1931, a period of first great
flowering of "the sense of wonder." In those years Hamilton already
proved to be the readers' choice for most popular author. (And the astute
reader will also note that in some of those years the Solar System had only
eight planets, Pluto not having yet been discovered. )
The evident success of Hamilton's novel
OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSE (Ace F-271) brought forth a demand for more of the
Interstellar Patrol's fabulous exploits. Here they are,
color, excitement, and adventure such as today's slide-rule writers are just
too brain-washed to attempt.
-D.A.W.
crashing suns
Copyright ©, 1965, by Edmond Hamilton
Magazine
versions, copyright, 1928, 1929, 1930, by Popular Fiction Publishing Co.
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
CRASHING SUNS 5
THE
STAR STEALERS 54
WITHIN THE NEBULA 90
THE COMET DRIVERS 129
THE COSMIC CLOUD 164
Printed
in U.S.A.
CRASHING
SUNS I
.A.s
the control-levers
flashed down under my hands our ship dived down through space with the
swiftness of thought. The next instant there came a
jarring shock, and our craft spun over like a whirling top. Everything in the
conning-tower, windows and dials and controls, seemed to be revolving about me
with lightning speed, while I clung dizzily to the levers in my hands. In a
moment I managed to swing them back into position, and at once the ship righted
herself and sped smoothly on through the ether. I drew a deep breath.
The
trap-door in the little room's floor slid open, then, and the startled face of
big Hal Kur appeared, his eyes wide.
"By
the Power, Jan Tor!" he exclaimed; "that last meteor just grazed us!
An inch nearer and it would have been the end of the ship!"
I turned to him for a moment, laughing.
"A miss is as good as a mile," I quoted.
He grinned back at me. "Well, remember
that we're not out on die Uranus patrol now," he reminded me. "What's
our course?"
"Seventy-two degrees sunward, plane No. 8,"
I told him, glancing at the
dials. "We're less than four hundred thousand miles from Earth,
now," I added, nodding toward the broad window before me.
Climbing up into the little conning-tower,
Hal Kur stepped over beside me, and together we gazed out ahead.
The
sun was at the ship's left, for the moment, and the sky ahead was one of deep
black, in which the stars, the flaming stars of interplanetary space, shone
like brilliant jewels. Directly ahead of us there glowed a soft little orb of
misty light, which was growing steadily larger as we raced on toward it. It was
our destination, the cloud-veiled little world of Earth, mother-planet of all our race. To myself, who had
passed much of my life on the four outer giants, on Jupiter and Saturn and
Uranus and Neptune, the little planet ahead seemed insignificant, almost, with
its single tiny moon. And yet from it, I knew,
had come that unceasing stream of human life, that dauntless flood of pioneers,
which had spread over all the solar system in the last hundred thousand years.
They had gone out to planet after planet, had conquered the strange atmospheres
and bacteria and gravitations, until now the races of man held sway over all
the sun's eight wheeling worlds. And it was from this Earth, a thousand
centuries before, that there had ventured out the first discoverers' crude
little spaceboats, whose faulty gravity-screens and uncertain controls contrasted
strangely with the mighty leviathans that flashed between the planets now.
Abruptly I was aroused from my musings by the
sharp ringing of a bell at my elbow. "The telestereo," I said to Hal
Kur. "Take the controls." As he did so I stepped over to the
telestereo's glass disk, inset in the room's floor, and touched a switch beside
it. Instantly there appeared standing upon the disk, the image of a man in the
blue and white robe of the Supreme Council, a lifesize and moving and
stereo-scopically perfect image, flashed across the void of space to my
apparatus by means of etheric vibrations. Through the medium of that projected
image the man himself could see and hear me as well as I could see and hear
him, and at once he spoke directly to me.
"Jan
Tor, Captain of Interplanetary Patrol Cruiser 79388," he said, in the
official form of address. "The command of the Supreme
Council of the League of Planets, to Jan Tor. You are directed to
proceed with all possible speed to Earth, and immediately upon your arrival
there to report
6
to the
Council, at the Hall of Planets. Is the order heard?"
"The
order is heard and will be obeyed," I answered,
making the customary response, and the figure on the disk bowed, then abruptly
vanished.
I turned at once to a speaking-tube which
connected with the cruiser's screen rooms. "Make all speed possible to
reach Earth," I ordered the engineer who answered my call.
"Throw open all the left and lower screens and
use the full attraction of the sun until we are within twenty thousand miles
of Earth; then close them and use the attraction of Jupiter and Neptune to
brake our progress. Is the order heard?"
When
he had acknowledged the command I turned to Hal Kur. "That should bring us
to Earth within the hour," I told him, "though the Power alone knows
what the Supreme Council wants with a simple patrol-captain."
His
laugh rumbled forth. "Why, here's unusual modesty, for you! Many a time I've heard you tell how the Eight Worlds would be run
were Jan Tor of the Council, and now you're but 'a simple patrol-captain!'
"
With that parting gibe he slid quickly down
through the door in the floor, just in time to escape a well-aimed kick. I
heard his deep laughter bellow out again as the door clanged shut behind him,
and smiled to myself. No one on the cruiser would have permitted himself such
familiarity with its captain but Hal Kur, but the big engineer well knew that
his thirty-odd years of service in the Patrol made him a privileged character.
As the door slammed shut behind him, though,
I forgot all else for the moment and concentrated all my attention on the
ship's progress. It was my habit to act as pilot of my own cruiser, whenever
possible, and for the time being I was quite alone in the round little
pilot-house, or conning-tower, set on top of the cruiser's long, fishlike hull.
Only pride, though, kept me from summoning an assistant to the controls, for
the sun was pulling the cruiser downward with tremendous velocity, now, and as
we sped down past Earth's shining little moon we ran into a belt of meteorites
which gave me some ticklish moments. At last, though, we were through the
danger zone, and were dropping down toward Earth with decreasing speed, as the
screens were
7
thrown
open which allowed the pull of Neptune and Jupiter to check our progresss.
A
touch of a button then brought a pilot to replace me at the controls, and as we fell smoothly down toward
the green planet below I leaned out the window, watching the dense masses of
interplanetary shipping through which we were now threading our way. It seemed,
indeed, that half the vessels in the solar system were assembled around and
beneath us, so close-packed was the jam of traffic. There were mighty
cargoships, their mile-long hulls filled with a thousand products of Earth, which were ponderously getting under way for
the long voyages out to Uranus or Neptune. Sleek, long passengerships flashed
past us, their transparent upper-hulls giving us brief glimpses of the gay
groups on their sunlit decks. Private pleasure-boats were numerous,
too, mostly affairs of gleaming white, and most of these were apparently bound
for the annual Jupiter-Mars space-races. Here and there through the confusion
dashed the local police-boats of Earth, and I caught sight of one or two of the
long black cruisers of the Inter-planetary Patrol, like our own, the swiftest
ships in space. At last, though, after a slow, tortuous progress through the
crowded upper levels, our craft had won through the jam of traffic and was
swooping down upon the surface of Earth in a great curve.
In a panorama of meadow and forest, dotted
here and there with gleaming white cities, the planet's parklike surface
unrolled before me as we sped across it. We rocketed over one of its oceans,
seeming hardly more than a pond to my eyes after the mighty seas of Jupiter and
the vast ice-fringed oceans of Neptune; and then, as we flashed over land
again, there loomed up far ahead the gigantic white dome of the great Hall of
Planets, permanent seat of the Supreme Council and the center of government of
the Eight Worlds. A single titanic structure of gleaming white, that reared its
towering dome into the air for over two thousand feet, it grew swiftly larger
as we raced on toward it. In a moment we were beside it, and the cruiser was
slanting down toward the square landing-court behind the great dome.
As we came to rest there without a jar, I snapped open a 8 small door in the conning-tower's side, and in a moment had descended
to the ground by means of the ladder inset in the cruiser's side. At once there
ran forward to meet me a thin,
spectacled young man in the red-slashed robe of the Scientists, an
owlish-looking figure at whom I stared for a moment in amazement. Then I had recovered
from my astonishment and was grasping his hands.
"Sarto
Sen!" I cried. "By the Power, I'm glad to see youl I thought you were
working in the Venus Laboratories."
My
friend's eyes were shining with welcome, but for the moment he wasted no time
in speech, hurrying me across the court toward the inner door of the great
building.
"The
Council is assembling at this moment," he explained rapidly as we hastened
along. "I got the chairman, Mur Dak, to hold up the meeting until you
arrived."
"But
what's it all about?" I asked, in bewilderment. "Why wait for me?"
"You
will understand in a moment," he answered, his face grave. "But here
is the Council Hall."
By that time we had hastened down a series of
long white corridors and now passed through a high-arched doorway into the
great Council Hall itself. I had visited the place before—who in the Eight
Worlds has not?—and the tremendous, circular room and colossal, soaring dome
above it were not new to me, but now I saw it as few ever did, with the eight
hundred members of the Supreme Council gathered in solemn session. Grouped in a great half-circle around the dais of the
chairman stretched the curving rows of seats, each occupied by a member, and
each hundred members gathered around the symbol of the world they represented,
whedier that world was tiny Mercury or mighty Jupiter. On the
dais at the center stood the solitary figure of Mur Dak, the chairman.
It was evident that, as my friend had informed me, the Council had just
assembled, since for the moment Mur Dak was not speaking, but just gazing
calmly out over the silent rows of members.
In a
moment we had passed down the aisle to his dais and stood beneath him. To my
salute he returned a word of greeting only, then
motioned us to two empty seats which had apparently been reserved for us. As I
slipped into mine I wondered, fleetingly, what big Hal Kur would have thought
9 to see his captain thus taking a seat with the Supreme Council itself. Then that thought slipped from my mind as
Mur Dak began to speak.
"Men
of the Eight Worlds," he said slowly, "I have called this session of
the Council for the gravest of reasons. I have
called it because discovery has just been made of a peril which menaces the
civilization, the very existence, of all our race—a
deadly peril which is rushing upon us with unthinkable speed, and which
threatens the annihilation of our entire universe!"
He
paused for a moment, and a slow, deep hum of surprize ran over the assembled
members. For the first time, now, I saw that Mur Dak's keen, intellectual face
was white and drawn, and I bent forward, breathless, tensely listening. In a
moment the chairman was speaking on.
"It
is necessary for me to go back a little," he said, "in order that you
may understand the situation which confronts us. As you know, our sun and its
eight spinning planets are not motionless in space. Our sun, with its family of
worlds, has for eons been moving through space at the approximate rate of
twelve miles a second, across the Milky Way. You know, too, that all odier
suns, all other stars, are moving through space likewise, some at a lesser
speed than ours and some at a speed inconceivably greater. Flaming new suns,
dying red suns, cold dark suns, each is flashing through the infinities of
space on its own course, each toward its appointed doom.
"And among that infinity of thronging
stars is that one which we know as Alto, that great red star, that dying sun,
which has been steadily drawing near to us as the centuries have passed, and
which is now nearest to us of all the stars. It is but little larger than our
own sun, and as you all know, it and our own sun are moving toward each other,
rushing nearer each other by thousands of miles each second, since Alto is
moving at an unthinkable speed. Our scientists have calculated that the two
suns would pass each other over a year from now, and thereafter would be speeding
away from each other. There has been no thought of danger to us from the
passing of this dying sun, for it has been known that its path through space
would cause it to pass us at a distance of billions of miles. And had the star
10
Alto
but continued in that path all would have been well. But now a thing
unprecedented has happened.
"Some
eight weeks ago the South Observatory on Mars reported that the approaching
star Alto seemed to have changed its course a little, bearing inward toward the
solar system. The shift was a small one, but any change of course on the part
of a star is quite unprecedented, so for the last eight weeks the approaching
star has been closely watched. And during those weeks the effect of its shift
in course has become more and more apparent. More and more the star has veered
from the path it formerly followed, until it is now many millions of miles out of its course, with its deflection
growing greater every minute. And this morning came the climax. For this
morning I received a telestereo message from the director of the Bureau of
Astonomical Science, on Venus, in which he informed me that the star's change of course is disastrous, for us. For instead of passing us by
billions of miles, as it would have done, the star is now heading straight toward our own sun. And our sun is racing to meet
it!
"I
need not explain to you what the result of this situation will be. It is
calculated by our astronomers that in less than a j^ear our sun and this dying
star will meet head on, will crash together in one gigantic flaming collision.
And the result of that collision will be the annihilation of our universe. For the planets of our system will perish like flowers in a furnace, in that titanic holocaust of crashing suns!"
Mur Dak's voice ceased, and over the great
hall there reigned a deathlike silence. I think that in that moment all of us
were striving to comprehend with our dazed minds the thing that Mur Dak had
told us, to realize the existence of the deadly peril that was rushing to wipe
out our universe. Then, before that silence could give way to the inevitable
roar of surprize and fear, a single member rose from the Mercury section of the
Council, a splendid figure who spoke directly to Mur Dak.
"For a hundred thousand years," he
said, "we races of man have met danger after danger, and have conquered
them, one after another. We have spread from world to world, have conquered and
grasped and held until we are
11
masters of
a universe. And now that that universe faces destruction, are we to sit idly
by? Is there nothing whatever to be done by us, no chance, however slight, to
avert this doom?"
A storm of cheers burst out when he finished, a wild tempest of applause that raged over the
hall with cyclonic fury for minutes. I was on my feet with the rest, by that
time, shouting like a madman. It was the inevitable reaction from that moment
of heart-deadening panic, the uprush of the old will to conquer that has
steeled the hearts of men in a thousand deadly perils. When it had died down a
little, Mur Dak spoke again.
"It
is not my purpose to allow death to rush upon us without an effort to turn it
aside," he told us, "and fortune has placed in our hands, at this
moment, the chance to strike out in our own defense. For the last three years
Sarto Sen, one of our most brilliant young scientists, has been working on a
great problem, the problem of using etheric vibrations as a propulsion force to
speed matter through space. A chip floating in water can be propelled across
the surface of the water by waves
in it; then why should not matter likewise be propelled through space, through
the ether, by means of waves or vibrations in that ether? Experimenting on this problem, Sarto Sen has been able to make small moBls which can be flashed through space, through the ether, by means of
artificially created vibrations in that ether, vibrations which can be produced
with as high a frequency as the light-vibrations, and which thus propel the
models through space at a speed equal to the speed of light itself.
"Using
this principle, Sarto Sen has constructed a small ten-man cruiser, which can
attain the velocity of light and which he has intended to use in a voyage of
exploration to the nearer stars. Until now, as you know, we have been unable to venture outside the solar system, since
even the swiftest of our gravity-screen spaceships can not make much more than
a few hundred thousand miles an hour, and at that rate it would take centuries
to reach the nearest star. But in this new vibration-propelled cruiser, a
voyage to the stars would be a matter of weeks, instead of centuries.
"Several
hours ago I ordered Sarto Sen to bring his new cruiser here to the Hall of
Planets, fully equipped, and at
12
this
moment it is resting in one of the landing-courts here, manned by a crew of six
men experienced in its operation and ready for a trip of any length. And it is my proposal that we send this new cruiser,
in this emergency, out to the approaching star Alto, to discover what forces or
circumstances have caused the nearing sun to veer from its former path. We
know that those forces or those circumstances must be extraordinary in
character, thus to change the course of a star;
and if we can discover what phenomena are the causes of the star's deflection,
there is a chance that we might be able to repeat or reverse those phenomena,
to swerve the star again from the path it now follows, and so save our solar
system, our universe."
Mur
Dak paused for a moment, and there was an instant of sheer, stunned silence in
the great hall. For the audacity of his proposal was overwhelming, even to us
who roamed the limits of the solar system at will. It was well enough to rove
the ways of our own universe, as men had done for ages, but to venture out into
the vast gulf beyond, to flash out toward the stars themselves and calmly
investigate the erratic behavior of a titanic,
thundering sun, that was a proposal that left us breathless for the moment. But only for the
moment, for when our brains had caught the magnitude of the idea another wild
burst of applause thundered from the massed members, applause that rose still
higher when the chairman called Sarto Sen himself to the dais and presented him
to the assembly. Then, when the tumult had quieted a little, Mur Dak went on.
"The cruiser will start at once,
then," he said, "and there remains but to choose a captain for it.
Sarto Sen and his men will have charge of the craft's operation, of course, but
there must be a leader for the whole expedition, some quick-thinking man of
action. And I have already chosen such a man,
subject to your approval, one whose name most of you have heard. A man young in
years who has served most of his life in the Interplanetary Patrol, and who
distinguished himself highly two years ago in the great space-fight with the
interplanetary pirates oif Japetus: Jan Tor!"
I swear that up to the last second I had no
shadow of an idea that Mur Dak was speaking of me, and when he turned to gaze
straight at me, and spoke my name, I could
-13
only
stare in bewilderment. Those around me, though, pushed me to my feet, and the
next moment another roar of applause from the hundreds of members around me
struck me in the face like a physical blow. I walked clumsily to the dais, under that storm of approval, and stood
there beside Mur Dak, still half-dazed by the unexpectedness of the thing. The
chairman smiled out at the shouting members.
"No
need to ask if you approve my choice," he said, and then turned to me, his
face grave. "Jan Tor," he addressed me, his solemn voice sounding
clearly over the suddenly hushed hall, "to you is given the command of
this expedition, the most momentous in our history. For on this expedition and
on you, its leader, depends the fate of our solar
system. It is the order of the Supreme Council, then, that you take command of
the new cruiser and proceed with all speed to the approaching star, Alto, to
discover the reason for that star's change of course and to ascertain whether
any means exist of again swerving it from its path. Is the order heard?"
Five minutes later I strode with Sarto Sen
and Hal Kur into the landing-court where lay the new cruiser, its long,
fishlike hull glittering brilliandy in the sunlight. A door in its side snapped
open as we drew near, and through it there stepped out to meet us one of the
six blue-clad engineers who formed the craft's crew. "All is ready for the
start," he said to Sarto Sen in reply to the latter's question, standing
aside for us to enter.
We passed through the door into the cruiser's
hull. To the left an open door gave me a glimpse of the ship's narrow
living-quarters, while to the right extended a long room in which other
blue-clad figures were standing ready beside the ship's shining, conelike
vibration-generators. Directly before us rose a small winding stairway, up
which Sarto Sen led the way. In a moment, following, we had reached the
cruiser's conning-tower, and immediately Sarto Sen stepped over to take his
place at the controls.
He touched a stud, and a warning bell gave
sharp alarm throughout the cruiser's interior. There were hurrying feet,
somewhere beneath us, and then a long clang as the heavy triple-doors slammed
shut. At once began the familiar
14
throb-throb-throb of the oxygen pumps, already at work replenishing and purifying the air
in our hermetically sealed vessel.
Sarto
Sen paused for a moment, glancing through the broad window before him, then
reached forth and pressed a series of three buttons. A low, deep humming filled
the cruiser's whole interior, and there was an instant of breathe less
hesitation. Then came a sharp click as Sarto Sen pressed another switch; there
was a quick sigh of wind, and instantly the sunlit landing-court outside
vanished, replaced in a fraction of a second by the deep, star-shot night of
interplanetary space. I glanced quickly down through a side window and had a
momentary glimpse of a spinning gray ball beneath us, a ball that dwindled to a
point and vanished even in the moment that I glimpsed it. It was Earth,
vanishing behind us as we fled with frightful velocity out into the gulf of
space.
We
were hurtling through the belt of asteroids beyond Mars, now, and then ahead,
and to the left, there loomed the mighty world of Jupiter, expanding quickly
into a large whitebelted globe as we rocketed on toward it, then dropping
behind and diminishing in its turn as we sped past it. The sun behind us had
dwindled by that time to a tiny disk of fire. An hour later and another giant
world flashed past on our right, the icy planet Neptune, outermost of the Eight
Worlds. We had passed outside the last frontier of the solar system and were
now racing out into the mighty deeps of space with the speed of light on our
mad journey to save a universe.
II
An hour after we had left the solar system Hal Kur
and I still stood with Sarto Sen in the cruiser's
conning-tower, staring out with him at the stupendous panorama of gathered
stars that lay before us. The sun of our own system had dwindled to a far point
of light behind us, by that time, one star among the millions that spangled the
deep black heavens around us. For here, even more than between the planets, the
stars lay before us in their true glory, un-
15
dimmed by
proximity to any one of them. A host of glittering points of fire, blue and
green and white and red and yellow, they dotted the rayless skies thickly in
all directions, and thronged like a great drift of swarming bees toward our
upper left, where stretched the stupendous belt of the Milky Way. And dead
ahead, now, shone a single orb that blazed in smoky, crimson glory, a single
great point of red fire. It was Alto, I knew, the sullen-burning star that was
our goal.
It
was with something of unbelief that I gazed at the red star, for though the
dials before me assured me that we were speeding on toward it at close to two
hundred thousand miles a second, yet except for the deep humming of the craft's
vibratory apparatus one would have thought that the ship was standing still.
There was no sound of wind from outside, no friendly, near-by planets, nothing
by which the eye could measure the tremendous velocity at which we moved. We
were racing through a void whose very immensity and vacancy staggered the mind,
an emptiness of space in which the stars themselves floated like
dust-particles in air, a gulf traversed only by hurtling meteors or flaring
comets, and now by our own frail little craft.
Though I was peculiarly affected by the
strangeness of our position, big Hal Kur was even more so. He had traveled the
space-lanes of the solar system for the greater part of his life, and now all
of his time-honored rules of interplanetary navigation had been upset by this
new cruiser, a craft entirely without gravity-screens, which was flashing from
sun to sun propelled by invisible vibrations only. I saw his head wagging in
doubt as he stared out into that splendid vista of thronging stars, and in a
moment more he left us, descending into the cruiser's hull for an inspection of
its strange propulsion apparatus.
When he had gone I plunged at once into the
task of learning the control and operation of our craft. The next two hours I
spent under the tutelage of Sarto Sen, and at the end of that time I had
already learned the essential features of the ship's control. There was a
throttle which regulated the frequency of the vibrations generated in the
engine-room below, thus increasing or decreasing our speed at will, and a lever
and dial which were used to project the pro-
16
pelling
vibrations out at any angle behind us, thus controlling the direction in which
we moved. The main requisite in handling the craft, I found, was a precise and
steady hand on the two controls, since a mere touch on one would change our
speed with lightning swiftness, while a slight movement of the other would send
us millions of miles out of our course almost instantly.
At
the end of two hours, however, I had attained sufficient skill to be able to
hold the cruiser to her course without any large deviations or changes of
speed, and Sarto Sen had confidence enough in my ability to leave me alone at
the controls. He departed down the little stair behind me, to give a few
minutes' inspection to the generators below, and I was left alone in the
conning-tower.
Standing
there in the dark little room, its only sound the deep humming of the
generators below and its only lights the hooded glows which illuminated the
dials and switches before me, I gazed intently through the broad fore-window,
into that crowding confusion of swarming suns that lay around us, that medley
of jeweled fires in which the great star Alto burned like a living flame. For a
long time I gazed toward the star that was our goal, and then my thoughts were
broken into by the sound of Sarto Sen reascending the stair behind me. I half
turned to greet him, then turned swiftly back to the
window, stiffening into sudden attention.
My eyes had caught sight of a small patch of
deep blackness far ahead, an area of utter darkness which was swiftly
expanding, growing, until in less than a second, it seemed, it had blotted out
half the thronging stars ahead. For a moment the sudden appearance of it
dumfounded me so that I stood motionless, and then my hands leaped out to the
controls. I heard Sarto Sen cry out, behind me, and had a glimpse of the
darkness ahead, obscuring almost all the heavens. The next moment, before my
hands had more than closed upon the levers, all light in the conning-tower
vanished in an instant, and we were plunged into the most utter darkness which
I have ever experienced. At the same moment the familiar hum of the
vibration-generators broke off suddenly.
I think that the moment that followed was the
one in which 17
I
came first to know the meaning of terror. Every spark of light had vanished,
and the silencing of the vibration-generators could only mean that our ship was
drifting blindly through this smothering blackness. From the cruiser's hull,
below, came shouts of fear and horror, and I heard Sarto Sen feeling his way to my side and fumbling with the controls.
Then, with startling abruptness, the lights flashed on again in the
conning-tower and through the windows there burst again the brilliance of the
starry heavens. At the same moment the vibration-generators began again to give
off their deep humming drone.
Sarto
Sen turned to me, his face white as my own. Instinctively we turned toward the
conning-tower's rear-window, and there, behind us, lay that stupendous area of
blackness from which we had just emerged. A vast, irregular area of utter
darkness, it was decreasing rapidly in size as we sped on away from it. In a
moment it had shrunk to the spot it had been when first I glimpsed it, and then
it had vanished entirely. And again we were racing on through the familiar,
star-shot skies.
I found my voice at last. "In the name
of the Power," I exclaimed, "what was that?"
Sarto Sen shook his head, musingly. "An
area without light," he said, half to himself; "and our
generators—they, too, could not function there. It must have been a hole, an
empty space, in the ether itself."
I could only stare at him in amazement. "A hole in the ether?" I repeated.
He nodded quickly. "You saw what
happened? Light is a vibration of the ether, and light was non-existent in that
area. Even our generators ceased to give off etheric vibrations, there being
no ether for them to function in. It's always been thought that the ether
pervaded all space, but apparently even it has its holes, its cavities, which
accounts for those dark, lightless areas in the heavens which have always
puzzled astronomers. If our tremendous speed and momentum hadn't brought us
through this one, the pull of the different stars would have slowed us down and
stopped us, prisoning us in that dark area until the end of time."
I
shook my head, only half-listening, for the strangeness of the thing had
unnerved me. "Take the controls," I told
18
Sarto
Sen. "Meteors are all in the day's work, but holes in the ether are too
much for me."
Leaving
him to his watch over the ship's flight, I descended to the cruiser's
interior, where the engineers were still discussing with Hal Kur the experience
through which we had just passed. In a few words I explained to them Sarto
Sen's theory, and they went back to their posts with
awed faces. Passing into the ship's living-quarters myself, I threw myself on
a bunk there and strove to sleep. Sleep came quickly enough, induced by the
generators' soothing drone, but with it came torturing nightmares in which I
seemed to move blindly onward through endless realms of darkness, searching in
vain for an outlet into the light of day.
When I awoke some six hours later, the position
of the ship seemed quite unchanged. The steady humming of its generators, the
smooth, onward flight, the legions of dazzling stars around us, all seemed as
before. But when I ascended again to the conning-tower, to relieve Sarto Sen at
the controls, I saw that already the star Alto had increased a little its
brilliance, dimming the stars around and behind it. And through the succeeding
hours of my watch in the conning-tower, it seemed to me almost that the red orb
was expanding before my sight, as we hurtled on toward it. That,
though, I knew to be only an illusion of my straining eyes.
But as day followed day—sunless, dawnless days which we could measure
only by our time-dials—the crimson star ahead waxed steadily to greater glory. By the time we marked off the twentieth day
of our flight Alto had expanded into a moon of crimson flame, whose sullen
splendor outrivaled the brilliance of all the starry hosts around us; for by
that time we had covered half the distance between our own sun and the dying one
ahead, and were now flashing on over the last half of our journey.
Days
they were without change, almost without incident. Twice we had sighted vast
areas of blackness, great ether-cavities like the one we had first plunged
through, but these we were fortunate enough to avoid, swerving far out of our
course to pass them by. Once, too, I had glimpsed for a single moment a
colossal black globe which flashed beside
19
our
path for an instant and then was left behind by our tremendous speed. Only a
glimpse did I get of this dark wanderer, which might have
been either a runaway planet or burned-out star. And once our ship blundered
directly into a vast maelstrom of meteoric material, a mighty whirlpool of
interstellar wreckage spinning there between the stars, and from which we won
clear only by grace of Sarto Sen's skillful hands at the controls.
Except
for these few incidents, though, our days were monotonous and changeless, days
in which the care of the generators and the alternate watches in the conning-tower
were our only occupations. And a strange stillness had seized us as we fled
onward, a brooding silence that fastened itself upon my friends even as upon
myself. Something from the vast, eternal silence through which we moved, some
quality out of those trackless infinities of space, seemed to have entered into
our inmost souls. We went about our duties like men in a dream. And dreamlike
our life had become to us, I think, and still more remote and unreal and
dreamlike had become the life of the eight worlds that lay so far behind us.
I had forgotten, almost, the mission upon which
we sped, and through the long watches in the conning-tower my eyes followed the
steady largening of the red sun ahead with curiosity only. Day by day its fiery
disk was creeping farther across the heavens, until at last everything in the
cruiser was drenched by the crimson, bloodlike light that streamed in through
our sunward windows. Then, at last, my mind came back to consideration of the
work that lay before us, for over thirty days of our journey had passed and
there remained less than a hundred billion miles between Alto and ourselves.
I gave orders to slow our progress, then, and
at a somewhat slackened speed our cruiser began to slant up above the plane of
the great sun, for it was my plan to gain a position millions of miles directly
above the star and then hover there, accompanying it on its race through space
and using the powerful little telescopic windows in the conning-tower for our
first observations. So through the next two days the giant sun, a single great
sea of crimson fire to our eyes, crept steadily downward across the skies as we
20
slanted
over it. Our outside instruments showed us that its heat was many times less
than that of our own sun, for this was a dying star. Even so it was necessary
to slide special light-repelling shields over all our windows, so blinding was
the star's glare.
On the fortieth day of our journey we had
reached our goal. Gathered in the conning-tower, Sarto Sen, Hal Kur and I gazed
down through its circular, periscopic under-window at the mighty star beneath.
We had reached a spot approximately twenty million miles above the sun and had
turned our course, so that we now raced above it at a speed that matched its
own, like a fly hovering over a world. Below us there lay only a single vast
ocean of crimson flame, that reached almost from
horizon to horizon, all but filling the heavens beneath us. It was in an awed
silence that we gazed down into this tremendous sea of fire, knowing as we did
that only the power of the ship's generators kept it from plunging downward.
"And
we are expected to investigate—that!" said
Hal Kur, gazing down into the hell of flame below. "They talk of turning that aside!"
I
looked at him, hopelessly. Then, before I could speak, there came a sudden
exclamation from Sarto Sen, and he beckoned me to his side. He had been staring
out through one of the powerful little telescopic windows set in the
conning-tower's wall, and as I reached him he pointed eagerly through it, out
beyond the rim of the fiery sun beneath. I gazed in that direction, straining
my eyes against the glare, and then glimpsed the thing that had attracted his
attention. It was a little spot of dun-colored light lying beyond the crimson
sun, a buff-colored little ball that hung steady behind the great sun at a
distance of perhaps a hundred million miles and that accompanied it on its
flight through space.
"A planet!" I whispered, and he. nodded.
Then Hal Kur, who had joined us, extended his hand too, with a muttered
exclamation, and there, thrice the distance of the first from Alto, there hung
another and smaller ball. In a few minutes, using the powerful inset glasses,
we had discovered no less than thirteen worlds that spun about the sun beneath
us and
21
that accompanied it on its tremendous journey
through *
space. Most seemed to revolve in orbits that were billions
of miles from their parent sun, and none of the others was
as large as that inmost planet which we had first discovered.
It was toward this largest world that we finally decided
to head first; so with Sarto Sen at the controls we slanted
down again from our position over the great sun, arrowing
down at reduced speed toward the inmost world. j
Its
color was changing from buff to pale red as we neared it, and its apparent size
was increasing with tremendous speed as our craft shot down toward it.
Gradually, though, Sarto Sen decreased our velocity until by the time we
reached an altitude of a few hundred miles above this world our ship was moving
very slowly. And now, from outside, came a thin shrieking of wind, a mounting
roar that told us plainly that we were speeding through air again, and that
this world had at least an atmosphere. None of us remarked on that, though, all
our attention being held by the scene below.
Drenched in the crimson light of the sun
behind us, it was a crimson world that lay beneath us, a lurid world whose
mountains, plains and valleys were all of the same bloodlike hue as the light
that fell upon them, whose very lakes and rivers gave back to the sky the
scarlet tinge that pervaded all things here. And as our cruiser swept lower we
saw, too, that the redness of the planet beneath was no mere illusion of the
crimson sunlight but inherent in itself, since all of the vegetation below,
grassy plains and tangled shrubs and stunted, unfamiliar trees, were of that
same red tinge that was the color-keynote of this world.
Strange
and weird as it appeared, though, there seemed no sign of life on the broad
plains and barren hills beneath us, and abruptly Sarto Sen headed the ship
across the planet's face, speeding low over its surface while we scanned intently
the panorama that unrolled beneath us. For minutes our straining scrutiny was
unrewarded; and then, far ahead, a colossal shape loomed vaguely through the
dusky crimson light, taking form, as we sped on toward it, as a tremendous,
soaring tower. And involuntarily we gasped as our eyes took in the hugeness of
its dimensions. It consisted of four slender black columns, each less than
fifty feet in thick-
22
ness, which rose from the ground at points a half-mile separated, four mighty
pillars which slanted up into the crimson sunlight for fully ten thousand feet,
meeting and merging at that distance above the ground and combining to support
a circular platform, and on it we could see the shapes of what appeared to be
machines, and other shapes that moved about them, though whether these last
were human or not could not be distinguished from our height. And then, as my
gaze fell toward the mighty tower's base, my cry brought the eyes of the others
to follow my pointing finger. For gathered beneath and around the tower and
extending away into the surrounding country were the massed buildings of a
city. Low and flat-roofed and utterly strange in appearance were those
buildings, and the narrow streets that pierced their huddled masses were all of
the same smooth blackness as the tower itself—black, deep black, the roofs and
streets and walls, laced with crimson parks and gardens that lay against their
blackness like splashes of blood. And looming over all, its four tremendous
columns rearing themselves above the streets and roofs and gardens like the
limbs of a bestriding giant, the mighty tower soared into the crimson sunlight.
Sarto Sen flung an arm down toward the
tower's platform,
beneath us, and toward the shapes that moved on that plat-
form. "Inhabited!" he cried. "You see? And that means that
Alto's change in course was----- "
He broke off; uttered a smothered cry. A
spark of intense white light had suddenly broken into being on the platform
beneath us, a beam of blinding light that stabbed straight up toward us,
bathing the cruiser in its unearthly glow. And suddenly our ship was falling!
Sarto Sen sprang to the controls wrenched
around the power-lever. "That ray!" he cried. "It's
attractive!—it's pulling us down!"
Our ship was vibrating now to the full force
of its generators, but still we were falling, plunging headlong down toward
the round platform beneath. I glimpsed Sarto Sen working frantically with the
controls, and heard a hoarse cry from Hal Kur. There was a blinding glare of
light all around us, now, and through the window I saw the platform
23
below
rushing up toward us with appalling speed. It was nearer, now . . . nearer . .
. nearer . . . crash!
Ill
I think
that in the minute after
the crash no one in the conning-tower made a movement. The blinding ray outside
had vanished at the moment of our crash, and we were now lying sprawled on the
little room's floor, where the shock of the collision had thrown us. In a
moment, though, I reached for a support and scrambled to my feet. As I did so
there came shouts from the hull beneath us, and then a loud clang as one of the
cruiser's lower doors swung open. I sprang to the window, just in time to see
our six engineers pour out of the hull beneath me, emerging onto the platform
on which our ship rested, and gazing about them with startled eyes.
I ripped open the little door in the
conning-tower's side, to shout to them to come back, and even as I did so saw
one of the men run back into the cruiser as though in fear. The others were
staring fixedly across the broad platform, and in that moment, before I could
voice the warning on my lips, their doom struck. There was a quick sigh of
wind, and from across the platform there sprang toward them a tiny ball of
rose-colored fire, a ball that touched one of the men and instantly expanded
into a whirlwind of raging flame. A single moment it blazed there,
then vanished. And where the five men had stood was—nothing.
Stunned,
stupefied, my eyes traveled slowly across the surface of the great platform.
Strange, huge machines stood close-grouped upon it, great shining structures
utterly unfamiliar in appearance. At the center of this
group of mechanisms stood the largest of them, a great tube of metal fully a
hundred feet in length, which was mounted on a strong pedestal which pointed up
into the sky like a great telescope. It was none of these things,
though, that held my attention in that first horror-stricken moment of
inspection. It was the dozen or more grotesque and terrible shapes which stood
grouped at the platform's farther edge, returning my gaze.
They were globes, globes of pink,
unhealthy-looking flesh 24 more than a yard in diameter, each upheld by six
slender, insectlike legs, not more than twelve inches long, and each possessing
two similar short, thin limbs which served them as arms and which projected at
opposite points from their pink, globular bodies. And between those arms, set
directly in the side of the round body itself, were the only features-two round
black eyes of large size, browless and pupilless, and a circle of pale skin
which beat quickly in and out with their breathing.
Motionless
they stood, regarding me with their unhuman eyes, and now I saw that one, a little
in advance of the others, was holding extended toward me a thin disk of metal,
from which, I divined instantly, the destroying fire had sprung. Yet still I
made no movement, staring across the platform with sick horror in my soul.
I
heard a thick exclamation from Hal Kur, behind me, as he and Sarto Sen came to
my side and gazed out with me. And now the grouped creatures opposite were
giving utterance to sounds—speech-sounds with which they seemed to
converse—low, deep, thrumming tones which came apparently from their
breathing-membranes. They moved toward us, the fire-disk still trained upon
us, and then one stopped and motioned from us to the platform on which he
stood. He repeated the gesture, and its meaning was unmistakable. Slowly we
stepped out of the conning-tower and descended by the ladder in the cruiser's
side to the platform itself.
Our captors seemed to pause for a moment,
now, and I had opportunity for a quick inspection of our ship. Sucked down as
it had been by the attractive ray of those strange creatures, it had yet fallen
on a clear space on the platform and seemed to have suffered no serious injury,
for it was stoutly built and our fall had been short. The lower door in its
side was still open, I saw, and now a half-dozen of the globe-creatures entered
this, scurrying forward like quick insects on their six short legs. They
disappeared from view inside the cruiser's hull, returning in a moment with
their fire disks trained upon the single engineer who had run back into the
ship and escaped the doom of his fellows. This man, Nar Lon by name, had been
the chief of the six engineers, and as his guards herded him to our side his
25
face was
white with terror. Finding us still alive, though, he seemed to take courage a
little.
Now
the thrumming conversation of the creatures about us broke off, and one turned
to the edge of the platform, touching a stud in the floor there. At once a
circular section of the metal floor, some ten feet across, slid aside,
revealing a round dark well of the same diameter, which apparently extended
down into one of the great tower's four supporting columns. At the top of this
shaft hung a small, square metal cage, or elevator, and into this we were
shepherded at once, two of our captors entering the cage with us and keeping
their fire-disks trained still upon us. There was the click of a switch, then a
sudden roar of wind, and instantly the cage was shooting downward with
tremendous speed. Only a moment we flashed down through the roaring darkness,
and then the cage came to rest and a section of wall beside it slid aside,
admitting a floor of dusky, crimson light. At once we stepped out, followed by
our two guards.
We
were standing at the foot of a mighty column down which we had come, standing
on the floor of a great, circular, flat-roofed room, in and out of which were
moving scores of the globe-creatures. From the very center of the room, behind
us, rose the fifty-foot thickness of the huge pillar, soaring up obliquely and
disappearing through the building's roof, two hundred feet above. Except for
the pillar and the hurrying figures around us the great room was quite bare and
empty, lit only by high, narrow slits in its walls which admitted long,
shafting bars of the crimson sunlight. I heard Hal Kur muttering his
astonishment at the titanic scale on which all things in this strange world
seemed planned, and then there came a thrumming order from our guards, who
gestured pointedly toward a high doorway set in the room's wall opposite us.
Obediently we started across the floor toward it.
Passing
through it, we found ourselves in a long, narrow corridor, apparently a
connecting passage between another building and the one we had just left. There
were windows on its sides, circular openings in the walls, and as we passed
down the hall I glimpsed through these the city that lay around us, a vista of
black streets and crimson gardens through which thronged other masses of the
globe-creatures.
26
Then,
before I could see more, the corridor ended and we passed into a large anteroom
occupied by a half-dozen of the globe-men, all armed with fire-disks which they
trained instantly upon us.
There
ensued a brief conversation between our guards and these, and then they stood
aside, allowing us to pass through a narrow doorway into a smaller room beyond.
Its sides were lined with shelves holding what seemed to be models of machines,
all quite unfamiliar in appearance. At the far end of the room stood a low,
desklike structure whose surface was covered with other models and with white
sheets of stiff cloth or paper covered with drawings and designs, and behind
this sat another of the globe-men, a little larger than any we had yet seen. As
we halted before him he inspected us for a moment with his large, unwinking
eyes, then spoke in deep, thrumming inflections to our
two guards. The latter answered him at length, and again he considered us.
During
the moments that we stood there I had noted that Sarto Sen, beside me, seemed
intensely interested in the models and design-covered sheets which lay on the
desk before us. Now, as the creature behind the desk seemed to pause, my friend
moved forward and picked up one of the sheets, and a metal pencil which lay
beside it. In a moment he was drawing on the sheet some design which I could
not see, and this done he handed it to the monster behind the desk. The latter
reached for it, inspected it closely, and then raised
his eyes to Sarto Sen with something of surprize apparent even on his unhuman
features. He uttered a short command, then, and instantly one of the two guards
motioned Sarto Sen aside, while the other herded Hal Kur, Nar Lon and me again
toward the door. As we passed out of the room I glanced back and saw Sarto Sen,
still under the watchful eyes of his guard, bending over the desk, intensely
interested, sketching another design.
Again we were in the anteroom, in which there
lounged still the guard of armed globe-men. Instead of returning to the
corridor through which we had come, though, we were conducted through a door on
the room's opposite side, and passed down a similar long hall, halted at last
by our guard before a low door in its side. This he flung open,
27
motioning
us to enter, and as the death-dealing disk in his grasp was trained full upon
us we had no choice but to obey, and passed into a square, solid-walled little
room which was but half-lit by a few loopholes in one of its sides. Behind us
the door slammed shut, its strong bolts closing with a loud grating of metal.
We were prisoners-prisoners on the planet of a distant star.
And
now, looking back, it seems to me that the days of imprisonment which followed
were the most terrible I have ever known. Action, no matter of what
sort, gives surcease at least from mental agony, and it was agony which we
suffered there in our little cell. For with the passing of every day, every
hour, the crimson sun above was drawing nearer toward our own by millions of
miles. And we, who alone had power to find the cause of the red sun's deflection—we
lay imprisoned there in the city of the globe-men, watching doom creep upon our
universe.
Hour followed hour and day followed day,
remorselessly, while we lay there, hours and days which we could measure only
by the steady circling of the sunlight that slanted through our tiny windows.
With each night came cold, a bitter cold that penetrated to our bones, and for
all the red splendor of the dying sun above, the days were far from warm. Twice
each day the door opened and a guard cautiously thrust in our food, which
consisted of a mushy mixture of cooked vegetables and a bottle of red-tinged,
mineral-tasting water.
We
spoke but little among ourselves, except to wonder as to the whereabouts of
Sarto Sen. We had heard nothing of him since we had left him and could not know
even whether our friend was alive or dead. What our own fate was to be we could
not guess, nor, in fact, was even that of much interest to us. A few months
longer and we would meet death with all on this planet, when Alto and our own
sun crashed together. Whether or not we lived until then was hardly a great
matter.
Then, ten days after our capture, there came
the first break in the monotony of our imprisonment. There was a rattle of
bolts at our door; it swung open, and Sarto Sen
28
stepped
inside. As the guards outside closed the door my friend sprang toward me, his
face eager.
"You're
all right, Jan Tor?" he exclaimed quickly. "They told me you were
unharmed, but I worried—"
A
phrase in his speech struck me. "They told you?" I repeated. "They?"
He
nodded, his eyes holding mine. "The globe-men," he said simply.
We
stared at him, and he stepped swiftly to the door, tried it and found it fast,
then came back and sat down beside us.
"The
globe-men," he repeated solemnly, "those children of Alto, those
creatures of hell, who have turned their parent sun from its course to send it
crashing into our own, to wipe out our universe."
At our exclamations of stunned surprize he
was silent, musing, his eyes seeming to gaze out through somber vistas of
horror invisible to us. When he spoke again it was slowly, broodingly, as
though he had forgotten our presence.
"I have found what we came here to
learn," he was saying; "have discovered the reason for the deflection
of this star. Yet even before, I guessed. ...
If a star had planets and those planets inhabitants—inhabitants of supreme
science, supreme power—would they not use that science and that power to save
themselves from death, even though it means death for another universe? And
that is what they have done, and what I suspected before.
"It was that suspicion that stood me in
good stead when we were examined there by the chief of the globe-men. I had glimpsed on his desk sheets with
astronomical designs on them, and so I took a sheet myself and drew on it a
simple design which he understood immediately, a design which represented two
suns colliding. It convinced him of my knowledge, my intelligence, so that when
he sent the rest of you to this cell he retained me for questioning. And for
hours afterward I drew other sketches, other designs, while with gestures he
interrogated me concerning them. It was slow, fumbling communication, but it
was communication, and gradually we perfected a system of signs and drawings
by which we were able to exchange ideas. And
29
through the succeeding days our sign-communication continued.
"I
informed him, in this way, that we were visitors from
another star, but I was too cautious to let him know that we were children of
the sun into which Alto was soon to crash. Instead I named Sirius as our native
star, explaining that we had come from there in our vibration-cruiser for
purposes of exploration. It was the cruiser which interested him most,
evidently. The scientists of the globe-people had been examining it, he told
me, and he now asked me innumerable questions concerning its design and
operation. For though the globemen have gravityrscreen ships, like our own
old-fashioned ones, in which they can travel from planet to planet, they have
no such star-cruisers as this one of ours. Hence his questions, which I evaded
as well as I could, turning the subject to the coming collision of the two
suns, which I stated had been foreseen by the astronomers of my own universe.
And as I had expected, my news of the coming collision was no surprize to him.
For, as he casually explained, that collision was being engineered in fact by
his own people, the globe-men, for their own purposes.
"For
ages, it seems these globemen have dwelt on the planets of Alto. First they had
inhabited the outermost planet, billions of miles from Alto itself, but which
was yet warm enough for existence because of their sun's titanic size and
immense heat. There they had risen to greatness, had built up their science and
civilization to undreamed-of heights. But as the ages passed, that outermost
world of theirs was growing colder and colder, since Alto, like all other suns,
was slowly but steadily cooling, shrinking and dying, radiating less and less
heat. At last there came a time when the planet of the globe-men was fast
becoming too cold for existence there, and then their scientists stirred
themselves to find a way out. Spurred on by necessity, they hit upon the
invention of the gravity screen and with it constructed their first
interplanetary space-ships. These they made in vast numbers,
and in them the globe-people moved en masse
to the next innermost
planet, which still received enough heat from Alto to support life. There they
settled, and there their civilization endured for further ages.
30
"But slowly, surely, their sun continued
to cool and die, and with the terrible, machinelike inevitability of natural
laws there came a day when again their world had grown too cold for their
existence. This time, though, they had the remedy for their situation at hand,
and again there took place a great migration from their cold planet to a warmer inner one. And so, as the ages passed,
they escaped extinction by migrating from planet to planet, moving ever sunward
as their sun waned in size and splendor, creeping closer and closer toward its
dying fires.
"At
last, though, after long ages, there drew down toward them the doom which they
had averted for so long. Alto was still shrinking, cooling, and now they were
settled upon its warmest, inmost planet, and had no warmer world to which to
flee. But a short time longer, as they measured time, and their planet would
become a frozen, lifeless world, for their sun would inevitably cool still
further until it was one of the countless dark stars, dead and burned-out suns,
which throng the heavens. It seemed, indeed, that this time there was to be no
escape.
"But now there came forward a party
among them which advanced a proposal of colossal proportions. They pointed out
that Alto was moving steadily toward another sun, one much the same size as
their own but flaming with heat and life, which it would pass closely within a
short time. But if, instead of passing each other, the two suns should meet,
should crash into each other, what then would be the result? It would be, of
course, that the collision would form one new sun instead of the former two—one
titanic, flaming sun whose heat would be sufficient to support life on any
planet for countless ages. The inmost planets of Alto's system, and virtually
all the planets of the other sun's system, would be annihilated by the
collision, of course, would perish in that flaming shock of suns. But the
outermost planets of Alto, which lay in orbits billions of miles from it, would
be safe enough and would take up their orbits around this great new sun in
place of Alto. And on these planets the globe-people could exist for eons,
supported by the heat of the great new sun. It was a perfect plan, and
required only that their own sun, Alto, be swerved
31
from its
path just enough to make it crash into the other sun instead of passing it.
"To
accomplish this, to swerve their star from its course, the globemen made use of
a simple physical principle. You know that a round, spinning body, moving
across or through any medium, changes its direction if the rate of its spinning
is changed. A ball that rolls across a smooth table without spinning at all
will move in a straight line. But if the ball spins as it rolls it will move in
a curved line, the amount and direction of curve depending
upon the amount and direction of spin. Now their sun, which had rotated at the
same rate for ages, had rolled through the ether for ages on the same great
course, never swerving. And so, they reasoned, if their sun's rate of spin or
rotation could be increased a little it would curve aside a little from its
accustomed course.
"The
problem, then, was to increase their sun's rate of spin, and to accomplish this
they gathered all their science. A mighty tower was erected over their city, on
whose great top-platform were placed machines which could generate an etheric
ray or vibration of inconceivable power, a ray which could be directed at will
through the great telescopelike projector which they had provided for it.
"This
done, they waited until the moment calculated by their astronomers, then aimed
the great projector-tube at the edge of their sun that was rotating away from
them, and turned on the ray. This was the crucial point of their scheme, for
now they were risking their very universe. It was necessary for them to
increase their sun's rate of spin just enough to make it swerve aside, but if
the rate of spin were increased just a little
too much it would mean disaster, since when a sun spins too fast it breaks up
like a great flywheel, splits into a double
star. It is that process, the process of fission, which has formed the
countless double stars and bursted suns in the heavens around us, since each
was only a single star or sun which broke up because of its too-great speed of
rotation, or spin. And the globe-men knew that it would require but very little
increase in their own sun's rate of spin to make it, too, split asunder. So
they watched with infinite care while their brilliant ray stabbed up toward
the sun's edge, and when, under the terrific
32
power of
that pushing ray, the star began to spin faster, they at once turned off the
ray, which was used for a short time only. But it had been effective; for now,
as their sun spun faster, it began to swerve a little from its usual course,
and they knew that now it would crash into the other approaching sun instead of
passing it. So their end was achieved, and so they began their preparations for
their great migration out to Alto's outermost planets, a migration which would
take place just before the collision. And then —we came.
"We
came, and now we have discovered that for which we came, the reason for Alto's
change in course. For it was the science and will of the globe-men that turned
their sun aside, that threatens now the annihilation
of the Eight Worlds. Doom presses upon them, and to escape that doom they are
destroying our sun, our planets, our very
universe!"
IV
I do
not remember that any of
us spoke, when Sarto Sen's voice had ceased. And yet, stunned as we were by the
thing he had told us, our knowledge was in some ways a relief. We had
discovered, at least, what had swerved Alto from its course, and if science and
intelligence alone could cause the sun to veer from its path, science and intelligence
might steer it back into that path.
When I said as much to Sarto Sen his face lit
up. "You are right, Jan Tor!" he exclaimed. "There's a chance!
And even as Mur Dak predicted, that chance depends on us. For if we can escape
from here and get back to the Eight Worlds, we can come back with a greater
force and crush these globe-men, and use their own force-projector to swerve
their sun out of its present path."
"But
why go back to the Eight Worlds?" objected Hal Kur. "Why not get up
to that platform, if we escape, and use the projector ourselves?"
Sarto Sen shook his head. "It's
impossible," he told the big engineer. "If we escape from here at all
it will be by night, for by day the rooms and corridors outside are thronged
with globe-men. And by night we could do nothing, for
33
Alto,
the sun itself, would not then be in the sky. Nor could we
wait for its rising, there on the platform, since our escape would soon be
discovered, and we should be attacked there. Our only chance is to get
out of here by night, make our way up to the platform, and make a dash for our
ship. If we can do that we can flash back to our own universe and get the help
we need to crush these globe-people."
"But
when shall we make the attempt?" I asked, and my heart leaped at Sarto
Sen's answer. "Tonight! The sooner we get out the
better. A few hours after dark we'll try it."
He
went on, then, to unfold his plan for escape, and we
listened intently, while big Hal Kur's eyes gleamed at the prospect of action.
Our plan was simple enough, and likely enough to fail, we knew, but it was our
only chance. What course we would follow after getting free of our cell we did
not even discuss. There was nothing for it but to make our break and trust to
luck to bring us through the thousand obstacles that lay between us and the
tower-platform which held our ship.
The
remaining hours of that day were the longest I have ever experienced. The
slanting shafts of light from the loopholes seemed to move across the room with
infinite slowness, while we awaited impatiently the coming of night. At last
the light-bars darkened, disappeared, as the dying crimson sun sank beyond the
rim of the world outside. Darkness had descended on that world, now, and here
and there among the buildings, and streets of the weird city outside flared
points of red light. Still we waited, until the vague,
half-heard sounds of soft movement and thrumming speech outside had lessened,
ceased, until at last, the only sound to be heard was an occastional shuffling
movement of the guard outside the door.
Sarto Sen rose,
making to us a signal of readiness, and then threw himself flat on the floor of
the room's center. At the farther side of the cell lay Hal Kur and Nar Lon, as
though sleeping, with a thick roll of garments between them which resembled
another sleeping figure. These preparations made, I stepped to the door and
stationed myself directly ins-de it, to one side, my heart pounding now as the
moment for action approached.
All was ready, and seeing this, Sarto Sen
began his part. Lying there on the floor he gave utterance to a low, deep
groan. There was silence for a moment, and then another low moan arose from
him, and now I heard a shuffling movement outside the door
as the guard there approached to listen. Again Sarto Sen groaned, terribly, and
after a moment's pause there came a rattling of bolts as the guard slid them
aside. I flattened myself back against the wall, and in a second the door opened.
Even
in the darkness, glancing sidewise, I could make out the round, globular form
of the guard, his eyes peering into our cell and his fire-disk held out in
cautious readiness. A moment he paused, peering at the three dim figures lying
across the room; then, as if satisfied, turned his eyes back upon Sarto Sen, at
the same moment taking a step inside the door. And with a single bound I was
upon'him.
Of all the fights in my career I place that
struggle there in the darkness with our globe-man guard as the most horrible. I
had leaped with the object of wresting the deadly lire-disk from him before he
could make use of it, and fortunately the force of my spring had knocked it
from his grasp. His short, thin arms clutched at me with surprizing power, though,
while the insect-like lower limbs grasped my own and pulled me instantly to the
floor. A moment I rolled there in mad combat, striving to gain a hold on my
opponent's smooth, round body, and then a thing happened (he memory of which
sickens me even now. For as my hands clutched for a hold on the sleek, cold,
globular body, I hat body suddenly collapsed beneath my weight
breaking like a skinful of water and spurting out a mass of semi-liquid
jellylike substance which flowed across the floor in a shining, malodorous
mass. Fleshlike as they were in appearance, these creatures were but globular
shells of ooze.
Sick
to my very soul I rose to my feet, looking wildly at the others, who had rushed
to aid me. There had been no cry from our guard during that moment of combat
and I lie silence around us was unchanged. Sarto Sen was already nt the door, peering down the corridor, and in a moment we
were out of the cell and making our way stealthily down the long hall. As we
left the cell, though, my foot
35
struck
against something, and reaching down I picked up the little fire-disk of our
guard. As we crept down the long corridor I clutched it tightly in my hand.
The
long hall, dimly lit by a few red flares set in its walls, seemed quite
deserted. Ahead, though, shone a square of brighter light, and we knew this to
be the spot where the corridor crossed the anteroom of the guards. Nearer we
crept toward it, even more stealthily, until at last we crouched at the edge
of the open doorway, staring into the bright-lit anteroom.
There
were but four of the globemen guards in it now, and three of these were
apparently sleeping, resting with closed eyes on a long, low seat against the
wall. The other, though was moving restlessly about the room, the deadly
fire-disk in his grasp ready for action. We must cross this room, I knew, to
reach the hall of the great pillar, yet it would mean instant death to attempt
it beneath the eyes of this creature.
A moment we crouched there, undecided whether
or not to chance all in a rush for the one wakeful guard, when the entire
matter was suddenly taken out of our hands. The globe-man, in his pacing about
the room, had come within a few feet of the doorway outside which we crouched,
and at that very moment the silence around us was shattered by a sound which
came to my ears like the thunder of an explosion. Hal Kur had sneezed!
With
the sound the pacing guard wheeled instantly and confronted us, uttering a
thrumming cry which brought the other three instantly to their feet. We were
evenly matched, four to four, and before they had time to use their deadly
disks we were upon them. The next moment was one of wild confusion, a whirling
of men and globular bodies about the little room, a babel
of hoarse shouts and thrumming cries. Clinging desperately to one of the
slippery creatures I had a momentary glimpse of Hal Kur raising one of the
guards bodily into the air and crashing him down on the hard floor like a
smashed egg. Then a powerful twist of my opponent flung me sidewise out of the
combat.
I staggered to my feet and saw that one guard
lay broken and dead on the floor while the other three had
36
slipped
from our clutches and were retreating through the doorway by which we had come.
Abruptly they paused, mid the arm of one came up with a fire-disk trained full upon us.
In
that moment I became aware of something in my hand to which I had clung through all the mêlée,
something round and thin
and hard, with a raised button on its side. Instinctively, entirely without
thought, I raised the thing toward the three guards opposite, pressing the
button on its side. A little ball of rosy fire seemed to leap out from my hand
with the action, flicking sighingly through the air and striking the group of
globe-men squarely. There was a roar of
flame, a moment's flaring up of raging pink fire, and I lien flame and guards alike had vanished.
I
turned, staggered with my friends toward the door. From far behind, now, we
heard deep, thrumming cries, and the
shuffle of quick feet. Our escape was discovered, we knew, and our only chance
lay in reaching the great pillar and its cage-lift before we were cut off, so
we raced on down the corridor with our utmost speed,
sparing no breath for speech. The cries behind were growing swiftly louder and
nearer, and somewhere near by there was a sudden clamor of gongs. But now we
were bursting recklessly into (he great hall, finding
it quite empty, its deep shadows dispelled only by a few feeble points of
light. Into the upper darkness loomed the vast bulk of the great, slanting
column, and with the last of our strength we reeled across the floor toward it.
The door in the pillar's side was open, and
through it we tumbled hastily into the little cage-elevator inside. The clamor
of pursuit was growing rapidly in volume, now. Frantically I fumbled with the
studs in the cage's side, with which I had seen our captors operate it. There was
a moment of heart-breaking delay, and then, just as the uproar of pursuit
seemed about to burst into the great hall, a switch clicked beneath my fingers and instantly our cage was shooting up
the shaft with tremendous speed, toward the platform above.
A moment of this thundering progress and then
the car slowed, stopped. We were in absolute darkness, but before sliding aside
the section of platform over us I whispered
37
tensely to
the others. "There will be guards on the platform," I told them,
"but we must make away with them at once and get to the ship. It's our
only chance, for there must be cage-lifts in the other pillars too, and they'll
come up those after us."
With
the words I touched the lever which swung aside the section of floor above us,
and instantly it slid back with a metallic jarring sound that made my heart
stand still. There was no sound of alarm, though, from above, so after a moment
of tense waiting we rose silently from the cage and stepped out upon the
platform itself.
We
were standing near the edge of the platform, which was partly illuminated by
splashes of ruddy light from a few flares suspended over it. Far below in the
darkness lay the city of the globe-men, outlined only by a sparse peppering of
twinkling crimson lights. Above stretched the splendid, star-jeweled skies, in
which I could discern the brilliant yellow orb that was the sun of the Eight
Worlds. And now I turned my attention back to the platform, and glancing beyond
the dark, enigmatic mechanisms which loomed around us, I saw the long, gleaming
bulk of our cruiser, lying still in the clear space where it had fallen. Beside
it a suspended flare poured down its red light, and under the light were
gathered three of the globe-men, examining intently some small mechanism on the
floor.
I wondered, momentarily, whether these
creatures had yet discovered the secret of our cruiser's design and operation,
and then forgot my wonder as we began to creep stealthily toward them. As we
crawled past a Httle heap of short, thick metal bars,
each of us grasped one, and then crept on again. In a moment we were within a
dozen paces of the unsuspecting globe-men, and at once we sprang to our feet
and charged down upon them with uplifted maces.
So unexpected and so swift was our attack
that the three had time only to turn toward us, half-raising their fire-disks,
and then our heavy clubs had crashed down through their round, soft bodies,
sending them to the floor in a sprawling oozing mass. We dropped our weapons
and sprang toward the cruiser.
Its lower door was open, and instantly we
were inside it 38
At
once Sarto Sen sprang up the stair toward the conning-tower, while Hal Kur and
Nar Lon raced into the generator-room. I paused to slam shut the heavy door, its
closing automatically starting the throbbing oxygen pumps, and then hastened up
the stair also. Even as I did
so there began the familiar humming of the vibration-generators, droning out
with swiftly gathering power. And now I had reached the conning-tower, where Sarto
Sen was working swiftly with the controls.
At
the moment that I burst into the little room there came a sudden harsh grating
of metal from outside, and then a score of high-pitched, thrumming cries. I sprang to the window, and there, across the
red lit platform, a mass of dark, globular figures had suddenly poured up onto
the platform's surface, from another of its pillar-lifts. They ran toward us,
heard the humming of the cruiser's generators, and then stopped short. Their
fire-disks swept up and a dozen balls of Ihe destroying flame leapt toward us.
But at the moment that they did so there was a swift clicking of switches
beneath the hands of Sarto Sen, a sudden roar of wind, and then the red-lit
platform and all on it had vanished from sight as our ship flashed out again
into the void of space.
V
Always, now, I remember the weeks of our homeward llight as
a seemingly endless time during which we flashed on and on through space,
struggling against our own desire to sleep. For now there were but four of us
to operate the cruiser, and the generators alone required the constant care of
two of our number, while another must stand watch in the conning-tower. That
meant that each of us could grasp hut a few hours of sleep at irregular
intervals, while our ship fled on. Even so I do not think that we could have managed with any other engineer than Nar
Lon, for he, who had been chief of the engineers, was
equal to three men in his knowledge and vigilance.
So we sped on, while Alto dwindled in size
behind us, and the bright star that was our own sun burned out in waxing glory
ahead. And through the long hours of my watches in
39
the
conning-tower I watched red star and yellow with an unceasing, growing
tearfulness, for well I knew that with each second they were leaping closer and
closer toward each other, and toward the doom of the Eight Worlds.
On
and on our cruiser hummed, at its highest speed, fleeing through the void
toward our own sun with the velocity of light. And surely never was voyage so strange as ours, since time began. A voyage from star to
star, in a ship flung forward by unseen vibrations, its crew four haggard and
burning-eyed men who were racing against time to carry the news on which
depended the fate of our universe. Dreamlike had been our outward voyage, but
this homeward flight resembled an endless torturing nightmare.
At
last, though, its end drew in sight, and gradually we slackened speed as we
flashed nearer toward our own universe. By the time we received our first
telestereo challenge from an Interplanetary Patrol cruiser outside Neptune we
were moving at a scant million miles an hour. When we announced our identity,
though, a peremptory order was flashed across the solar system for all
interplanetary traffic to clear the space-lanes between ourselves and Earth, so
that we were able to hurtle on toward the green planet at full speed without
danger of collisions. And so, at last, our ship was slanting down again over
the great Hall of Planets, into the very landing-court from which we had made
the start of our momentous voyage.
Fighting
against the fatigue which threatened to overwhelm me, I staggered out of the
cruiser into the waiting hands of those in the landing-court, and five minutes
later I was stumbling onto the dais where Mur Dak faced the hastily assembled
Council. Standing there, swaying a little from sheer exhaustion, I spoke to Mur Dak and to the Council, relating in concise phrases the
events of our voyage and the discovery we had made. When I had finished,
saluting and slumping into a chair, there was an utter, deathlike silence over
the great hall, and then a sigh went up as Mur Dak stepped forward to speak.
"You
have heard the report of Jan Tor," he said, his voice calm and even as
ever, "and you know now what doom threatens us and what chance we have to
avert that doom. And now you must make decision. As you know, during the
40
past weeks our scientists have been engaged in the construction of many
hundreds of new vibration-cruisers like the one used by Jan Tor in his voyage.
Soon, now, these cruisers will be complete, and they can be used by us in
either of two ways.
"We
can use them to save a fragment of our people, since in these ships a few
thousand of us can escape to another star, though all the rest of us must
inevitably perish with our universe when the two suns meet. Or we can use them
for battle, instead of flight, speeding out in them to this planet of Alto's,
attacking these globe-people and using their own force-ray projector in an
attempt to swerve Alto aside before it destroys us. And that is the decision
which you must make, a decision on which rests the fate of the races of man.
Shall a few of us flee in these star-cruisers to another universe, allowing the
oncoming sun to destroy our own, or shall we go out in them to Alto and make a
single desperate attempt to swerve the approaching sun aside, and save the
Eight Worlds?"
And now again there was silence, a thick and
heavy silence, fateful with the doom of universes, the destiny of suns. I felt
sleep overwhelming me, now, and though I struggled to keep my tired eyelids
open I was slipping farther and farther down into drowsy depths of oblivion.
Dimly, as though from an infinite distance, I heard a mighty shouting rising
from the massed members around me. Then, just before complete unconsciousness
descended on me, the roaring lessened for a single moment, and in that moment I
heard the voice of Mur Dak, strong and vibrant.
"You have made decision," he was
saying, "and when the cruiser-fleet is completed it shall start at once—for Alto!"
The three weeks that elapsed between our
return and the sailing of the great fleet were undoubtedly the most frenzied in
the history of the Eight Worlds. Our own scientists had calculated that if we
were to save our universe, Alto must be swerved from its course within the next
fifty days, since after that it would be too late, for even if swerved aside
after that time the dying sun would still crash through at least part of our
solar system, wrecking it completely. We must reach the ray-projector on Alto's
planet and use it
41
before the
end of the fiftieth day, or it would be too late.
So
through the first twenty of those fifty days all other work throughout the
Eight Worlds had been abandoned and every effort was
concentrated upon the completion of the cruisers. Each planet was furnishing
its own contingent for the fleet, and on each of the Eight Worlds men toiled to
exhaustion in laboratory and factory, while others stood ready to take their
places. Swiftly the cruisers, more than a thousand in number, approached
completion, and now were being equipped with the weapon our scientists had
devised for them, a deadly blue ray which had the power of stimulating atomic
movement in every molecule of matter it touched to such a point that whatever
matter was struck by it vanished beneath its touch, splitting instantly into
its original atoms.
And
through the nights, now, the men of every planet could see over their heads,
like a great menace in the heavens, the fiery orb of Alto, growing, growing,
dripping a crimson radiance upon the Eight Worlds, hanging in the heavens like
a great seal of blood. And beneath that sign of death the work went madly on.
And on all our planets laughter in sunlight and joy and freedom seemed things
gone forever. For over the Eight Worlds lay the gigantic, shadowing wings of
fear. . . .
One
event stands out in my memory against that time of terror, one which occurred
on the third day after our return. Mur Dak had summoned us again in the Hall
of Planets, this time to his office, and there, in the name of the Council, he
formally tendered me the post of commander-in-chief of the great fleet which
was even then preparing. No greater honor could have been accorded anyone in
the Eight Worlds, and I could only stammer a few words of thanks. And then the
chairman turned to Sarto Sen with the information that he had been named second
in command. To our surprize, though, my friend made no
answer, turning away from us for a moment and staring out of a window. When he
turned back to us it was to say quietly, "I can't accept the post."
We regarded him in astonishment, and Mur Dak
asked, "Your reason?"
"I can't say—now," replied my
friend, and the astonishment in our expressions deepened.
Then
Mur Dak's face became suddenly bleak, and his eyes scornful. "Is it
possible that you are afraid?" he asked.
A
deep flush rose over Sarto Sen's face but he did not answer, meeting our gaze
for a moment and then turning toward the door. The spell of surprize that had
held me broke then and I ran toward him, held his arm.
"Sarto Sen!" I cried, and could
voice no other word.
He
half turned toward me, his face softening a little, and then abruptly wheeled
and passed out of the door, leaving me standing there motionless.
The
others were regarding me with a certain
compassion, but seeing the misery on my face they made no comments on what had
just occurred, and without further remark Hal Kur was named as my lieutenant.
Later that day I learned that Sarto Sen, with Nar Lon and a few others of his assistants, had left in our
original cruiser for his Venus laboratories.
If
time had been mine I would have sought him out there, but now the cruisers of
our fleet were almost complete, and all my time was taken up by the business
of training the pilots who were to operate them. Luckily their controls were
simple, differing but little in practise from those of our ordinary
interplanetary space-ships, so that short as was the time at our disposal it
proved enough for the training of the selected men. And so at last there came
the twentieth day after our return, and on that night the great fleet made the
start of its momentous voyage.
We had planned for the cruisers from each
planet to proceed in separate groups out past Neptune, where all would
rendezvous and take up their flight for Alto. And so that night the Earth
contingent of ships made its start, from a great
plain beyond the Hall of Planets. Crowds from over all Earth had assembled
there to watch our departure—vast, silent crowds who watched our ships with the
knowledge written plain on their faces that we held in our hands their only
hope of life. And high above them gleamed the little
spot of blood-red light that was Alto, the sun that was our goal.
Standing with Hal Kur and
my pilot in the conning-tower 43 of my flagship, I watched the ground sinking away beneath us as we rose smoothly up from
Earth, with ever-increasing speed. As the gray old planet drew away beneath us
my heart twisted with the thought that Sarto Sen was left behind, this time.
And then our accompanying ships had slanted up beneath us and we were arrowing
out through the solar system to the rendezvous beyond Neptune. When we had
reached the appointed spot we paused, our cruisers hovering just beyond the icy
world. A few minutes we waited and then a cloud of dark spots appeared behind
us, sweeping smoothly up and resolving into a formation of cruisers which fell
into place behind us. It was the fleet from Mars and it was followed in quick
succession by the contingents from Uranus and Venus. Out from arctic Neptune,
behind us, there came now that worlds's ships, taking their place with us just
ahead of the group from ringed Saturn. Then, last and at the same time, came
the final two contingents, one a small one of few cruisers from Mercury, the
other the mighty fleet from Jupiter. More than a thousand cruisers in all we hovered there, the massed forces of the Eight Worlds.
I gave a telestereo order which flashed through
all the fleet, and the huge armada at once arranged itself in the form of a
great triangle, a thousand miles wide at its base, with my own cruiser at the
triangle's apex. Another order, and the whole vast
fleet moved smoothly forward at uniform speed, a speed that mounted quickly as
we flashed on through the ether toward the red star ahead with more and more
power. The forces of man had gathered themselves and were moving out toward
their supreme struggle, sailing out into the interstellar void to grapple with
their doom, risking on one great throw of dice the life or death of their universe.
Standing beside our pilot in my flagship's
conning-tower, Hal Kur and I peered through the broad fore-window, watching
Alto broaden again across the heavens as we raced on toward it. Already it
burned in the sky ahead like a great fire, since for four long weeks our fleet
had hummed on toward it at highest speed. And now, on the thirtieth day of our
44 flight, its end
was at last in sight and we were preparing for our descent on the city of the
globe-men.
The plan which we had formed was simple
enough. We were to swoop suddenly upon the city, and while it was being
attacked by the greater part of our fleet a picked few ships would land upon
the great tower-platform, taking possession of the projector there. This our
own scientists would train upon Alto in an effort to swerve the sun again from
its course. It must be done soon, I knew, for this was the fiftieth day, which
was our time-limit; and unless we made our stroke at the great sun before the
tenth hour, it had been calculated, Alto would still come close enough to the
solar system to cause collisions between its own far-swinging planets and our
own sun and worlds, wrecking our solar system. Less than twelve hours remained
to us.
Now,
as we swept on toward the lurid, immense sun ahead, it was concerning my own
courage that I felt most in doubt. The strange defection of Sarto Sen had already
unsettled my mind, and as I glanced back through the rear window and glimpsed
the far points of light which were all that was to be seen of the great fleet
following, I felt with deepening anxiety the immensity of my responsibilities
as commander.
How long I brooded there at the window I can
not guess, but I was finally aroused by a sudden sharp exclamation from Hal Kur.
The big engineer was gazing out through the front telescopic window toward the
fiery disk of the sun ahead, amazement on his face. In a moment he beckoned me
to his side, and I gazed out with him through the telescopic glass.
Even through the light-repelling shields
which had been swung over all our windows the glare of the mighty sun ahead was
almost blinding, but my eyes quickly became accustomed to it, and then I gave a
catch of indrawn breath. For I had glimpsed against the
crimson disk of Alto a little cloud of dark specks, a tiny swarm that seemed to
be growing steadily larger. Breathlessly we watched them, and now we
could not doubt that they were drawing nearer, increasing swiftly in size as
we raced to meet them. And now they were taking definite shape, seen through
our
45
magnifying window, taking shape as smooth, long, fishlike hulls-Hal Kur whirled
around to me, a flame leaping into his eyes. "They're ships!" he
cried. "Star-cruisers like our ownl Those
globe-men—they have our own cruiser!"
Something
seemed to check the beating of my own heart at that cry. The cruisers ahead
could only come from Alto, could only be manned by the globe-men of Alto's
planets. While we lay imprisoned they had studied the design of our own
cruiser, had understood and copied it, and during our homeward flight they had
built their own great fleet of star-cruisers, guessing that our escape meant an
attack on themselves later on. And now they had come
out to meet that attack, there in the interstellar void, and the two great
fleets were rushing headlong toward a battle
that would be fought between the stars!
A
moment I stood there, stunned, then
turned to the te-lestereo which transmitted my orders to the fleet. "All
ships prepare for battle," I announced,
as calmly as possible. "Reduce speed gradually to one hundred miles an
hour, holding the same formation until further order."
From
our own cruiser, below me, there came now a running of feet and a shouting
of hoarse voices, while there was a jarring and clanging of metal as the
ray-tubes in the cruiser's sides were quickly made ready for action. Our speed
was swiftly decreasing, now, and as I glanced
ahead I saw that the globe-men's ships were
apparently slackening speed also, advancing toward us more slowly and moving
now in two short columns. They knew, as well as we, that if both fleets used
their maximum speed they would be unable to make contact with eath other, and
they sought a decision no less than we.
Slowly, now, ever more slowly, the two fleets
were moving toward each other. I could
now plainly observe the approaching enemy cruisers, very similar in design to
our own but with shorter, thicker hulls, their globe-men pilots plainly visible
in their bright-lit conning-towers. Headlong they came toward us, and headlong
we advanced to meet them. Then, when the two fleets were almost at the point of
collid-
46
ing,
there leaped out toward us from the oncoming cruisers a multitude of balls of
destroying pink fire.
I
had been expecting this, and at the moment they fired I spoke a single word
into the telestereo. Instantly our own cruiser and the whole vast fleet behind
it slanted sharply upward, while the globe-men craft and their balls of fire
passed harmlessly beneath us. And as we swept over them there burned down from
our own cruisers the blue de-atomizing ray, striking more than a score of ships
in the fleet below and annihilating them instantly. In a moment we had passed
them and at once we circled, massed, and then sped back to strike another blow
at the enemy fleet, which had also circled and was coming to meet us.
Again
the two fleets were racing toward each other, and as they neared each other,
rosy fire and blue ray crossed and clashed from fleet to fleet. I saw the
flame-balls strike cruisers around and behind us, cruisers that vanished in
whirling storms of fire, though fire it could not have been that raged so
fiercely there in the airless void. In the other fleet, ship after ship was
flashing into blinding blue light and disappearing, as our rays struck them.
Then the two fleets had met, had mixed and mingled, so that the battle changed
suddenly to myriad individual combats between cruisers, whirling and striking
and falling there in the great gulf between the coldly smiling stars, flaring
into pink flame or blue light and vanishing from sight.
Toward us flashed an enemy cruiser, but as
its rosy flame leapt toward us we veered sharply to one side, while at the same
moment there came from the hull beneath me the hiss of released rays. They
struck the tail of the other, which had swerved a moment too late, and the next
moment it flared to a blue-lit wreck, then vanished.
But now two enemy cruisers were swooping down on us from above, ramming
headlong toward us. There was no time for us to twist aside from that fierce
plunge, but before they could loose their flame upon us the blue ray of a ship
beyond us stabbed across and struck one of the two, and in the moment that it
hovered there, luminous with its own destruction, the other smashed squarely
into it and then both had flared and vanished.
As
they did so a racing cruiser struck us a glancing blow 47
from beneath and our ship reeled and spun, throwing those of us in the
conning-tower violently to one side. When Hal Kur and I scrambled to our feet
the pilot lay motionless on the floor, stunned, and at once I leapt to the controls.
That moment in which our ship had been pilotless had driven us up above the
battle, which lay stretched below us as a mighty field of circling, striking
ships, burned across by pink flame and livid blue light. And now I was slanting
our own ship down again, swooping headlong down through space while the hissing
rays from our own hull seared down toward the enemy ships below. A wild
exultation thrilled through me, now, that sheer joy of battle which will ever
last in the heart of man, no matter what centuries of peace are his, and I
laughed crazily as we rose and circled and swooped again upon the whirling
ships below. Of all the battles in the long history of man's battles, surely this
was the most glorious of all. What ancient struggles on earth, or on the seas,
or between the planets themselves, could equal this mighty grappling of two
fleets in the void between the stars, with a mighty sun at their backs and the
fate of a universe at stake?
But now, as our cruiser soared again above
the fighting ships, I saw that the craft of the globe-men were perishing in
increasing numbers, assailed by the blue rays from our own. They seemed to
halt, waver for a moment, and then each of the globe-men's cruisers had ceased
fighting and had suddenly dropped down a full hundred miles, massing together
there and racing away toward Alto. They were in flight!
I had no need to command a pursuit, for at
sight of the fleeing craft our own ships turned and leapt eagerly after them,
my own cruiser in the van. Swiftly our speed mounted, until the two fleets were
flashing toward Alto at full speed, the enemy ships managing to keep just out
of striking distance ahead of us, while we strained our generators to the
utmost to close the gap between us. On and on they fled, at the speed of light,
with our own fleet close at their heels, on toward the crimson sun ahead, which
filled half the sky as we raced toward it. Suddenly a black blot appeared
against that sun, largening with terrific speed, and
48 in a moment the fleeting cruisers ahead
had disappeared inside it, vanished inside the great
ether-cavity which loomed now before ourselves. But our own ships never
faltered, speeding straight on, and in a second we, too, were plunging into
darkness unutterable as we raced straight into the vast ether-cavity after the
fleeing ships. The droning of our generators ceased and we drifted for a
torturing moment through the blackness, then burst out
again into the red glare of the great sun ahead. And ahead still fled the
globe-men's cruisers, heading directly toward their own sun.
Straight after them we raced, speeding over
the great sun in turn. Then, just when the greater part of our fleet was
flashing directly above the sun, the humming of our generators faltered and
died. And instantly our ship was falling, plunging headlong down into the fiery
ocean of Alto, ten million miles beneath!
The ships of our fleet were falling with us,
like wind-tossed leaves, and now I cried
out and pointed upward, even as we whirled down to the fiery death below. Far,
far above there hung a little group of cruisers from which broad rays of purple
light were stabbing down toward us, bathing our ships in a weird glow.
"They've trapped us!" I cried despairingly. "Those ships—that
purple ray—it's neutralizing the vibrations of our generators—they led us over
this sun and we're falling—"
Below yawned the
fiery ocean of red flame that was Alto, stretching from horizon to horizon, its
tongues and prominences licking hungrily up toward us. Even through the
super-insulation of the cruiser's walls we felt the growing, stifling heat of
the sun below. And then I cried out and pointed upward once more. A score of
cruisers at the tail of our fleet had escaped the fate of the rest of us by
swerving aside in time, and instantly they had turned and slanted upward, then
circled once and plunged down toward the hovering ray-ships. They never even
used the blue ray but made sure of their enemies by their own deaths, plunging
into the enemy cruisers in a score of swift, shattering collisions, and then
the purple rays around us had vanished, while the shattered wrecks above
whirled down into the crimson sun beneath us. With the vanishing of the rays
our generators took up again dieir familiar humming drone, and the ships of our
fleet slanted sharply up, to escape the fiery doom ,
below.
The
remaining ships of the globe-men's fleet had disappeared, now, and glancing at
our time-dials I gave an order through the telestereo. Our fleet, still over
five hundred cruisers strong, sped away from the great sun toward the
buff-colored little ball that was its inmost planet. Swiftly its color deepened
again to crimson as we arrowed down toward it, and I glanced anxiously again at
the time-dials, for less than a quarter-hour remained now in which to get the
ray-tube in action on the whirling sun behind us. Meteorlike our ships split
the air of the red planet as we shot across its surface, and in a moment we
were slanting down toward the city of the globe-men, toward the massed black
roofs and streets above which loomed the mighty tower.
As we dropped down toward it there rose to
meet us fully fifty star-cruisers like our own, the last remnants of the
globe-men's fleet which we had pursued in past their sun. With suicidal
determination they flashed straight up toward us, and the next minute was one
of swift, terrific battle, the air around us a hell of blue light and pink
flame, leaping and burning from ship to ship, while scores of wrecks whirled
down into the black city below. Five minutes after that fierce attack we had
lost a full hundred of our ships, but we had accounted for the last cruiser of
the globe-men, or so we thought.
And now my own flagship and the designated
few agreed on were dipping swiftly toward the great tower-platform, where stood
the ray-projector which we had fought our way from universe to universe to
reach. We were dropping lower, gradually decreasing our speed as we neared the
platform, lower, lower. . . .
A cry of fierce rage rang through the hull
beneath me, and at the same moment I was aware of a long, dark shape that
suddenly flashed down past us from above, a last cruiser of the globe-men which
must have hovered high above us until that moment. It dropped below us with
lightning speed, then hovered ominously beside the
tower-platform for a single moment. In that moment a hundred shafts of blue
light from our own ships leapt down toward
50 it, but even as they did so there spurted
from its side globe after globe of the annihilating pink flame, striking the
broad platform and the four mighty supporting columns of the tower in a score
of places. The enemy cruiser itself flashed into nothingness beneath the rays
of our ships, but a great cry went up from us as we saw that its work was done,
for the fire-balls that struck the tower blazed fiercely up for a moment and
then vanished; and then the mighty tower was swaying, falling, crumbling,
crashing down to the ground in a mighty avalanche of broken wreckage, raining
its mighty fragments upon the city far beneath. The tower was gone! The
ray-projector was annihilated!
And
now our ships hung motionless, stunned, even as I was stunned, gazing through
the window stupidly at the wreckage far below. We had lost! For when I finally
raised my eyes I saw that the pointer on the time-dial before me had passed the
tenth hour. Even had we had another ray-projector of our own, it would have
been too late. Nothing now could save the Eight Worlds,
nothing could swerve the mighty sun aside in time to save our universe. We
races of men had risked our lives, our universe, in one great cast of the dice,
and—we had lost.
Suddenly
Hal Kur seemed to go insane, there beside me in the conning-tower. He choked,
uttered incoherent exclamations, pointed a trembling
hand up through our telescopic window toward the thundering red sun above. I
did not raise my eyes, and he clutched my arm, pulling me to the window, his
upward-pointing hand trembling violently, his eyes staring.
I looked up. There, beside the very rim of
the mighty sun, was a tiny black spot, a long, dark speck that hung steady,
playing a beam of brilliant light upon Alto. For a moment I did not understand,
but gazed dazedly, trying to comprehend what I saw. That little black spot,
that long, black shape—
"Look!" Hal Kur was screaming, like one gone mad. "It's"—he choked, staggered— "It's our old cruiser! It's Sarto Sen!"
Sarto Sen! The name seared across my brain
like living fire. That ray—he was playing it upon the edge of Alto
51
even as
the globe-men had done—was spinning the great sun faster, faster—
"But
it's too late!" I cried, throwing an anguished hand out toward the time-dial.
Too
late! Nothing could swerve the sun aside in time to save the Eight Worlds, now.
Too—
I
stopped, a thick silence settling over us. And in that silence Hal Kur and I
gazed up together, awe falling upon our faces, such awe as had never been felt
by man before.
For
there, across the face of the mighty crimson sun, had appeared a thin black
line, a line that thickened, widened, with every second. And now it was a gap,
a narrow gap between the two cleft halves of the great red star, a gap that swiftly
was widening. Alto was splitting!
Splitting
into two great halves, into two masses of crimson flame which swept ever wider
from each other.
Splitting like a great flywheel, when the ray of Sarto Sen increased its
spinning to such a rate that it could no longer hold together. Beside it, its
brilliant ray playing upon the dividing sun until the last moment, hung the
little cruiser, and then it had vanished from sight as the right half of the
sun, an ocean of raging fires, swept over it.
But Sarto Sen had won! Farther
and farther apart swept the two halves of the divided sun, diverging each to
follow its separate course, moving away on either side, slowly, majestically.
Between them, now, there shone forth the yellow star that was our own sun, the
doom that had threatened it vanishing now as the two halves of Alto moved away
from each other, each receding farther and farther from each other and from our
own sun. And below us, now, the red planet that had been Alto's was moving away
also, hurtling toward the right half of the cleft sun and disappearing inside
it with a great burst of flame. Planet after planet was vanishing in right sun
or left, until at last our cruisers hovered alone in the void between the two
receding suns.
In our own cruiser, now, and in all the ships
around me, I knew, was rising a babel of hoarse shouts of
joy, of insane, frenzied gladness, and Hal Kur beside me was shouting like a
madman. The races of man had won, had conquered the
52
greatest
menace that had ever threatened them, had split a sun and wrecked a universe to
save their own.
But
for myself, in that moment, I knew only that my friend was dead.
It was night when the last of our fleet came
to Earth once more. We had sped in from the long days of our homeward flight,
pausing at each planet to allow the cruisers from that planet to leave us. And
few enough were the ships that returned to each world, of the hundreds that had
gone out, yet they were welcomed by such mighty, shouting crowds as no man had
seen before. For the Eight Worlds had gone mad with joy.
So,
at last, the dozen battered cruisers which were all that survived of Earth's
contingent were dropping down again toward the Hall of Planets. Brilliant
lights flared around it, and beneath them, it seemed, was collected half the
population of Earth, a mighty, shouting throng. Slowly our ships slanted down
over them, sinking down into the inner landing-courl of the great building, and
there it was that we were met by Mur Dak and the members of the Council.
The chairman was the first to wring my hand,
and it was from him that I learned first how Sarto Sen had planned to save us,
duplicating in his own laboratories the force-ray of the globe-men and speeding
out with it in our old cruiser to Alto, accompanied only by Nar Lon and his
devoted assistants. He carried out his plan under the imputation of cowardice,
as Mur Dak told me with working face, because he knew that that plan meant
death for himself and knew that I would have insisted
on sharing that death.
But
now the shouting of the great throng outside the Hall of Planets was becoming
insistent, and they were calling for Jan Tor. Already the Council members were
passing out of the landing-court with the crews of the surviving cruisers,
passing through the building to the crowd outside, which greeted them with a
mighty roar of applause. Mur Dak alone remained, with Hal Kur and me, and in a
moment he left us also, with our promise to follow in a few minutes. I could
not, just then, face those rejoicing, welcoming masses. Beside me, T knew,
there would have stood, invisible to them, the shade of another, the shadow of
a thin, spectacled
53
youth to
whom all this was due. So I stood in the quiet landing-court, gazing up into
the jeweled skies once more-gazing up toward two tiny spots of red light,
far-separated already, which gleamed above us.
A
mist seemed to come across my eyes, blurring and obscuring the two far points
of light at which I gazed. From beside me, then, came the deep voice of Hal
Kur.
"I
know, Jan Tor," he was saying. "He was my friend, too." He
gestured toward the battered cruisers beside us, then up into the light-jeweled
heavens.
"It
was from this Earth that the first man went out, Jan Tor. Out
to planet after planet, until a universe was theirs. And now that Sarto
Sen has saved that universe, and has given us these cruisers, how far will man
go, I wonder? Out— out—universe after universe, star after star,
constellations, nebulae—out—out—out. . . ."
He paused, a dark, erect figure beside me
there, his arm flung up in superb, defiant promise toward the brilliant,
thronging stars.
THE STAR STEALERS
I
As i
stepped into the narrow bridgeroom the pilot at the controls there turned
toward me, saluting.
"Alpha Centauri dead ahead, sir,"
he reported.
"Turn thirty degrees outward," I
told him, "and throttle down to eighty light-speeds until we've passed the
star."
Instantly
the shining levers flicked back under his hands, and as I stepped over to his
side I saw the arrows of the speed-dials creeping backward with the slowing of
our flight. Then, gazing through the broad windows which formed the room's
front side, I watched the interstellar panorama ahead shifting sidewise with
the turning of our course.
The narrow bridgeroom lay across the very top
of our ship's long, cigarlike hull, and through its windows all the brilliance
of the heavens around us lay revealed. Ahead flamed the great double star of
Alpha Centauri, two mighty blazing suns which dimmed all else in the heavens,
and
54
which
crept slowly sidewise as we veered away from them. Toward our right there
stretched along the inky skies the far-flung powdered fires of the galaxy's
thronging suns, gemmed with the crimson splendors of Betelgeuse and the clear
brilliance of Canopus and the hot white light of Rigel. And straight ahead,
now, gleaming out beyond the twin suns we were passing, shone the clear yellow star
that was the sun of our own system.
It
was the yellow star that I was watching, now, as our ship fled on toward it at
eighty times the speed of light; for more than two years had passed since our
cruiser had left it, to become a part of that great navy of the Federation of
Stars which maintained peace over all the Galaxy. We
had gone far with the fleet, in those two years, cruising with it the length
and breadth of the Milky Way, patrolling the space-lanes of the Galaxy and
helping to crush the occasional pirate ships which appeared to levy toll on the
interstellar commerce. And now that an order flashed from the authorities of
our own solar system had recalled us home, it was with an unalloyed eagerness
that we looked forward to the moment of our return. The stars we had touched
at, the peoples of their worlds, these had been frjendly enough toward us, as
fellow-members of the great Federation, yet for all their hospitality we had
been glad enough to leave them. For though we had long ago become accustomed
to the alien and unhuman forms of the different stellar races, from the strange
brain-men of Algol to the birdlike people of Sirius, their worlds were not
human worlds, not the familiar eight little planets which swung around our own
sun, and toward which we were speeding homeward now.
While I mused thus at the window the two
circling suns of Alpha Centauri had dropped behind us, and now, with a swift
clicking of switches, the pilot beside me turned on our full speed. Within a
few minutes our ship was hurtling on at almost a thousand light-speeds, flung
forward by the power of our newly invented de-transforming generators, which
could produce propulsion-vibrations of almost a thousand times the frequency of
the light-vibrations. At this immense velocity, matched by few other craft in
the Galaxy, we were leaping through millions of miles of space each
55
second,
yet the gleaming yellow star ahead seemed quite unchanged in size.
Abruptly
the door behind me clicked open to admit young Dal Nara, the ship's second-officer,
descended from a long line of famous interstellar pilots, who grinned at me
openly as she saluted.
"Twelve more hours,
sir, and we'll be there," she said.
I
smiled at her eagerness. "You'll not be sorry to get back to our little
sun, will you?" I asked, and she shook her head.
"Not
I! It may be just a pinhead beside Canopus and the rest, but there's no place
like it in the Galaxy. I'm wondering, though, what made them call us back to
the fleet so suddenly."
My own face clouded, at that. "I don't
know," I said, slowly. "It's almost unprecedented for any star to
call one of its ships back from the Federation fleet, but there must have been
some reason—"
"Well," she said cheerfully,
turning toward the door, "it doesn't matter what the reason is, so long as
it means a trip home. The crew is worse than I am—they're scrapping the
generators down in the engineroom to get another light-speed out of them."
I
laughed as the door clicked shut behind her, but as I turned back to the window
the question she had voiced rose again in my mind, and I gazed thoughtfully
toward the yellow star ahead. For as I had told Dal Nara, it
was a well-nigh unheard-of thing for any star to recall one of its cruisers
from the great fleet of the Federation. Including as it did every
peopled star in the Galaxy, the Federation relied entirely upon the fleet to
police the interstellar spaces, and to that fleet each star contributed its
quota of cruisers. Only a last extremity, I knew, would ever induce any star to
recall one of its ships, yet the message flashed to our ship had ordered us to
return to the solar system at full speed and report at the Bureau of
Astronomical Knowledge, on Neptune. Whatever was behind the order, I thought, I
would learn soon enough, for we were now speeding over the last lap of our
homeward journey; so I strove to put the matter from my mind for the time
being.
With an odd persistence, though, the question
continued to trouble my thoughts in the hours that followed, and when
56
we finally swept in toward the solar system twelve hours later,
it was with a certain abstractedness that I watched the slow largening of the
yellow star that was our sun. Our velocity had slackened steadily as we
approached that star, and we were moving at a bare one light-speed when we
finally swept down toward its outermost, far-swinging planet, Neptune, the
solar system's point of arrival and departure for all interstellar commerce.
Even this speed we reduced still further as we sped past Neptune's single
circling moon and down through the crowded shipping-lanes toward the surface of
the planet itself.
Fifty
miles above its surface all sight of the planet beneath was shut off by the
thousands of great ships which hung in dense masses above it—that vast tangle
of interstellar traffic which makes the great planet the terror of all inexperienced
pilots. From horizon to horizon, it seemed, the ships crowded upon each other,
drawn from every quarter of the Galaxy. Huge grain-boats from Betelgeuse, vast,
palatial liners from Arcturus and Vega, ship-loads of radium ores from the
worlds that circle giant Antares, long, swift mailboats from distant Deneb—all
these and myriad others swirled and circled in one great mass above the planet,
dropping down one by one as the official traffic-directors flashed from their
own boats the brilliant signals which allowed a lucky one
to descend. And through occasional rifts in the crowded mass of ships could be
glimpsed the interplanetary traffic of the lower levels, a swarm of swift
little boats which darted ceaselessly back and forth on their comparatively
short journeys, ferrying crowds of passengers to Jupiter and Venus and Earth,
seeming like little toy-boats beside the mighty bulks of the great interstellar
ships above them.
As our own cruiser drove down toward the mass
of traffic, though, it cleared away from before us instantly; for the symbol of
the Federation on our bows was known from Canopus to Fomalhaut, and the
cruisers of its fleet were respected by all the traffic of the Galaxy. Arrowing
down through this suddenly opened lane we sped smoothly down toward the
planet's surface, hovering for a moment above its perplexing maze of white
buildings and green gardens, and then slanting down toward the mighty
flat-roof-
57 ed building which housed the Bureau of Astronomical Knowledge.
As we sped down toward its roof I could not but contrast the warm, sunny green
panorama beneath with the icy desert which the planet had been until two
hundred thousand years before, when the scientists of the solar system had
devised the great heat-transmitters which catch the sun's heat near its blazing
surface and fling it out as high-frequency vibrations to the receiving-apparatus
on Neptune, to be transformed back into the heat which warms this world. In a
moment, though, we were landing gently upon the broad roof, upon which rested
scores of other shining cruisers whose crews stood outside them watching our arrival.
Five
minutes later I was whirling downward through the building's interior in one of
the automatic little cone-elevators, out of which I stepped into a long white
corridor. An attendant was awaiting me there, and I followed him down the
corridor's lenpth to a high black door at its end, which he threw open for me,
closing it behind me as I stepped inside.
It was an ivory-walled, high-ceilinged room
in which I found myself, its whole farther side open to the sunlight and
breezes of the green gardens beyond. At a desk across the room was sitting a
short-set man with gray-streaked hair and keen, inquiring eyes, and as I
entered he sprang up and came toward me.
"Ran
Rarak!" he exclaimed. "You've come! For two days, now, we've been
expecting you."
"We were delayed off Aldebaran, sir, by
generator trouble," I replied, bowing, for I had recognized the speaker as
Hums Hoi, chief of the Bureau of Astronomical Knowledge. Now, at a motion from
him, I took a chair beside the desk while he resumed his own seat.
A moment he regarded me in silence, and then
slowly spoke. "Ran Rarak," he said, "you must have wondered why
your ship was ordered back here to the solar system. Well, it was ordered back
for a reason which we dared not state in an open message, a reason which, if
made public, would plunge the solar system instantly into a chaos of unutterable panic!"
He was silent again for a moment, his eyes on
mine, and
58
then
went on. "You know, Ran Rarak, that the universe itself is composed of
infinite depths of space in which float great clusters of suns, star-clusters
which are separated from each other by billions of light-years of space. You
know, too, that our own cluster of suns, which we call the Galaxy, is roughly
disklike in shape, and that our own particular sun is situated at the very edge
of this disk. Beyond lie only those inconceivable leagues of space which
separate us from the neighboring star-clusters, or island-universes, depths of
space never yet crossed by our own cruisers or by anything else of which we
have record.
"But
now, at last, something has crossed those abysses, is crossing them; since over
three weeks ago our astronomers discovered that a gigantic dark star is
approaching our Galaxy from the depths of infinite space—a titanic, dead sun
which their instruments showed to be of a size incredible, since, dark and
dead as it is, it is larger than the mightiest blazing suns in our own Galaxy,
larger than Canopus or Antares or Betelgeuse—a dark, dead star millions of
times larger than our own fiery sun—a gigantic wanderer out of some far realm
of infinite space, racing toward our Galaxy at a velocity inconceivable!
"The
calculations of our scientists showed that this speeding dark star would not
race into our Galaxy but would speed past its edge, and out into infinite space
again, passing no closer to our own sun, at the edge, than some fifteen billion
miles. There was no possibility of collision or danger from it, therefore; and
so though the approach of the dark star is known to all in the solar system,
there is no idea of any peril connected with it. But there is something else
which has been kept quite secret from the peoples of the solar system, something
known only to a few astronomers and officials. And that is that during the last
few weeks the path of this speeding dark star has changed from a straight path
to a curving one, that it is curving inward toward the edge of our Galaxy and
will now pass our own sun, in less than twelve weeks, at a distance of less
than three billion miles, instead of fifteen! And when this titanic dead sun
passes that close to our own sun there can be but one result. Inevitably our
own sun will be caught by the powerful gravitational grip of the giant dark
star and carried out" with
59 all its planets into the depths of infinite
space, never to return!"
Hums
Hoi paused, his face white and set, gazing past me with wide, unseeing eyes. My
brain whirling beneath the stunning revelation, I sat rigid, silent, and in a moment he went on.
"If
this thing were known to all," he said slowly, "there would be an
instant, terrible panic over the solar system, and for that reason only a
handful have been told. Flight is impossible, for there are not
enough ships in the Galaxy to transport the trillions of the solar system's
population to another star in the four weeks that are left to us. There is but
one chance—one blind, slender chance—and that is to turn aside this
onward-thundering dark star from its present inward-curving path, to cause it
to pass our sun and the Galaxy's edge far enough away to be harmless. And it is
for this reason that we ordered your return.
"For it is my plan to speed out of the
Galaxy into the depths of outer space to meet this approaching dark star,
taking all of the scientific apparatus and equipment which might be used to
swerve it aside from this curving path it is following.
During the last week I have assembled the equipment for the expedition and have
gathered together a force of fifty star-cruisers which are even
now resting on the roof of this building, manned and ready for the trip. These
are only swift mail-cruisers, though, specially equipped for the trip, and it
was advisable to have at least one battle-cruiser for flag-ship of the force,
and so your own was recalled from the Federation fleet. And although I shall go
with the expedition, of course, it was my plan to have you yourself as its
captain.
"I know, however, that you have spent
the last two years in the service of the Federation fleet; so if you desire,
another will be appointed to the post. It is one of danger-greater danger, I
think, than any of us can dream. Yet the command is yours, if you wish to
accept it."
Hurus
Hoi ceased, intently scanning my face. A moment I sat silent, then rose and
stepped to the great open window at the room's far side. Outside stretched the
greenery of gardens, and beyond them the white roofs. of
buildings, gleaming beneath the faint sunlight. Instinctively my eyes
60
went up to the source of light, the tiny sun,
small and faint and far, here, but still-the sun. A long moment I gazed up toward it, and then turned back to Hurus Hoi. "I accept,
sir," I said.
He
came to his feet, his eyes shining. "I knew that you would," he said,
simply, and then: "All has been ready for days, Ran Rarak. We start at
once."
Ten
minutes later we were on the broad roof, and the crews of our fifty ships were
rashing to their posts in answer to the sharp alarm of a signal bell. Another five minutes and Hurus Hoi, Dal Nara and I stood in
the bridgeroom of my own cruiser, watching the white roof drop behind and
beneath as we slanted up from it. In a moment the half-hundred cruisers on that
roof had risen and were racing up behind us, arrowing with us toward the
zenith, massed in a close, wedge-shaped formation.
Above,
the brilliant signals of the traffic-boats flashed swiftly, clearing a wide lane for us, and then we had passed through the jam of traffic and
were driving out past the incoming lines of interstellar ships at swiftly
mounting speed, still holding the same formation with the massed cruisers behind
us.
Behind and around us, n$)w,
flamed the great panorama of the Galaxy's blazing stars, but before us lay only
darkness—darkness inconceivable, into which our ships were flashing out at
greater and greater speed. Neptune had vanished, and far behind lay the single yellow spark that was all visible of our
solar system as we fled out from it. Out—out—out—rocketing, racing on, out past
the boundaries of the great Galaxy itself into the lightless void, out into
the unplumbed depths of infinite space to save our threatened sun.
II
Twenty-four hours after our start I stood again in the
bridgeroom, alone except for the silent, imperturbable figure of my
ever-watchful wheelman, Nal Jak, staring out with him into the black gulf that
lay before us. Many an hour we had stood side by
side thus, scanning the interstellar
61
spaces
from our cruiser's bridgeroom, but never yet had my eyes been confronted by
such a lightless void as lay before me now.
Our
ship, indeed, seemed to be racing through a region where light was all but
non-existent, a darkness inconceivable to anyone who
had never experienced it. Behind lay the Galaxy we had left, a great swarm of
shining points of light, contracting slowly as we sped away from it. Toward
our right, too, several misty little patches of light glowed faintly in the
darkness, hardly to be seen; though these, I knew, were other galaxies or
star-clusters like our own—titanic conglomerations of thronging suns dimmed to
those tiny flickers of light by the inconceivable depths of space which
separated them from ourselves.
Except
for these, though, we fled on through a cosmic gloom that was soul-shaking in
its deepness and extent, an infinite darkness and stillness in which our ship
seemed the only moving thing. Behind us, I knew, the formation of our fifty
ships was following close on our track, each ship separated from the next by a
five hundred mile interval and each flashing on at exactly the same speed as
ourselves. But though we knew they followed, our fifty cruisers were naturally
quite invisible to us, and as I gazed now into the tenebrous void ahead the
loneliness of our position was overpowering.
Abruptly
the door behind me snapped open, and I half turned toward it as Hurus Hoi
entered. He glanced at our speed-di: Is and his brows arched in surprize.
"Good
enough," he commented. "If the rest of our ships can hold this pace
it will bring us to the dark star in six days."
I nodded, gazing thoughtfully ahead.
"Perhaps sooner," I estimated. "The dark star is coming toward
us as a tremendous velocity, remember. You will notice on the
tele-chart—"
Together we stepped over to the big
telechart, a great rectangular plate of smoothly burnished silvery metal which
hung at the bridgeroom's end-wall, the one indispensable aid to interstellar
navigation. Upon it were accurately reproduced, bv means of projected and reflected rays, the positions and progress of all
heavenly bodies near the ship.
62
Intently
we contemplated it now. At the rectangle's lower edge
there gleamed on the smooth metal a score or more of little circles of glowing
light, of varying sizes, representing the suns of the edge of the Galaxy behind
us. Outermost of these glowed the light-disk that was
our own sun, and around this Hurus Hoi had drawn a shining line or circle lying
more than four billion miles from our sun, on the chart. He had computed that
if the approaching dark star came closer than that to our sun its mighty
gravitational attraction would inevitably draw the latter out with it into
space; so the shining line represented, for us, the danger line. And creeping
down toward that line and toward our sun, farther up on the blank metal of the
great chart, there moved a single giant circle of deepest black, an ebon disk a
hundred times the diameter of our glowing little sun-circle, which was sweeping
down toward the Galaxy's edge in a great curve.
Hurus
Hoi gazed thoughtfully at the sinister dark disk, and then shook his head.
"There's something very strange about that dark star," he said,
slowly. "That curving path it's moving in is contrary to all the laws of
celestial mechanics. I wonder if—"
Before he could finish, the words were broken
off in his mouth. For at that moment there came a terrific shock, our ship
dipped and reeled crazily, and then was whirling blindly about as though caught
and shaken by a giant hand. Dal Nara, the pilot, Hurus Hoi and I were slammed
violently down toward the bridgeroom's end with the first crash, and then I
clung desperately to the edge of a switch-board as we spun dizzily about. I had
a flashing glimpse, through the windows, of our fifty cruisers whirling blindly
about like wind-tossed straws, and in another glimpse saw two of them caught
and slammed together, both ships smashing like eggshells beneath the terrific
impact, their crews instantly annihilated. Then, as our own ship dipped
crazily downward again, I saw Hurus Hoi creeping across the floor toward the
controls, and in a moment I had slid down beside him. Another instant and, we
had our hands on the levers, and were slowly pulling them back into position.
Caught and buffeted still by the terrific
forces outside, our cruiser slowly steadied to an even keel and then leapt
63
suddenly
forward again, the forces that held us seeming to lessen swiftly as we flashed
on. There came a harsh, grating sound that brought my heart to my throat as one
of the cruisers was hurled past us, grazing us, and then abruptly the mighty
grip that held us had suddenly disappeared and we were humming on through the
same stillness and silence as before.
I
slowed our flight, then, until we hung motionless, and then we gazed wildly at
each other, bruised and panting. Before we could give utterance to the
exclamations on our lips, though, the door snapped open and Dal Nara burst into
the bridgeroom, bleeding from a cut on her forehead.
"What
was that?" she cried, raising a trembling hand to her head. "It
caught us there like toys—and the other ships—"
Before any of us could answer her a bell
beside me rang sharply and from the diaphragm beneath it came the voice of our
message-operator.
"Ships
37, 12, 19 and 44 reported destroyed by collisions, sir," he announced,
his own voice tremulous. "The others report that they are again taking up
formation behind us."
"Very
well," I replied. "Order them to start again in three minutes, on
Number One speed-scale."
As I turned back from the instrument I drew a
deep breath. "Four ships destroyed in less than a minute," I said. "And by what?"
"By a whirlpool of ether-currents,
undoubtedly," said Hur-us Hoi. We stared at him blankly, and he threw out
a hand in quick explanation. "You know that there are currents in the
ether—that was discovered ages ago—and that those currents in the Galaxy have
always been found to be comparatively slow and sluggish, but out here in empty
space there must be currents of gigantic size and speed, and apparently we
stumbled directly into a great whirlpool or maelstrom of them. We were
fortunate to lose but four ships," he added soberly.
I shook my head. "I've sailed from
Sirius to Rigel," I said, "and I never met anything like that. If we
meet another—"
The strangeness of our experience, in fact,
had unnerved me, for even after we had tended to our bruises and were again
racing on through the void, it was with a new fear-
64
fulness
that I gazed ahead. At any moment, I knew, we might plunge directly into some
similar or even larger maelstrom of ether-currents, yet there was no way by
which we could avoid the danger. We must drive blindly ahead at full speed and
trust to luck to bring us through, and now I began to understand what perils lay between
us and our destination.
As
hour followed hour, though, my tearfulness gradually lessened, for we
encountered no more of the dread maelstroms in our onward flight. Yet as we
hummed on and on and on, a new anxiety came to trouble me, for with the passing
of each day we were putting behind us billions of miles of space, and were
flashing nearer and nearer toward the mighty dark star that was our goal. And
even as we fled on we could see, on the great telechart, the dark disk creeping
down to meet us, thundering on toward the Galaxy from which, unless we succeeded,
it would steal a star.
Unless we succeeded! But could we succeed?
Was there any force in the universe that could turn aside this oncoming dark
giant in time to prevent the theft of our sun? More and more, as we sped on,
there grew in my mind doubt as to our chance of success. We had gone forth on a
blind, desperate venture, on a last slender chance, and now at last I began to
see how slender indeed was that chance. Dal Nara felt it, too, and even Hums
Hoi, I think, but we spoke no word to each other of our thoughts, standing for
hours on end in the bridgeroom together, and gazing
silently and broodingly out into the darkness where lay our goal.
On the sixth day of our flight we computed,
by means of our telechart and flight-log, that we were within less than a
billion miles of the great dark star ahead, and had slackened our speed until
we were barely creeping forward, attempting to locate our goal in the dense,
unchanged darkness ahead.
Straining
against the windows, we three gazed eagerly forward, while beside me Nal Jak,
the wheelman, silently regulated the ship's speed to my orders. Minutes passed
while we sped on, and still there lay before us only the deep darkness. Could
it be that we had missed our way, that our
calculations had been wrong? Could it be—and then the
65
wild
speculations that had begun to rise in my mind were cut short by a low
exclamation from Dal Nara, beside me. Mutely she pointed ahead.
At
first I could see nothing, and then slowly became aware of a feeble glow of
fight in the heavens ahead, an area of strange, subdued light which stretched
across the whole sky, it seemed, yet which was so dim as to be hardly visible
to our straining eyes. But swiftly, as we watched it, it intensified,
strengthened, taking shape as a mighty circle of pale luminescence which filled
almost all the heavens ahead. I gave a low-voiced order to the pilot which reduced our speed still further, but even so the
fight grew visibly stronger as we sped on.
"Light!"
whispered Hurus Hoi. "Light on a dark star! It's impossible—and
yet—"
And now, in obedience to another order, our
ship began to slant sharply up toward the mighty circle's upper limb, followed
by the half-hundred ships behind us. And as we lifted higher and higher the
circle changed before our eyes into a sphere—a tremendous, faintly glowing
sphere of size inconceivable, filling the heavens with its vast bulk, feebly
luminous like the ghost of some mighty sun, rushing through space to meet us as
we sped up and over it. And now at last we were over it, sweeping above it with
our little fleet at a height of a half-million miles, contemplating
in awed silence the titanic dimensions of the faint-glowing sphere beneath us.
For in spite of our great height above it,
the vast globe stretched from horizon to horizon beneath us, a single smooth,
vastly curving surface, shining with the dim, unfamiliar light whose source we
could not guess. It was not the light of fire, or glowing gases, for the sun
below was truly a dead one, vast in size as it was. It was a cold light, a faint but steady phosphorescence
like no other light I had ever seen, a feeble white glow which stretched from
horizon to horizon of the mighty world beneath. Dum-foundedly we stared down
toward it, and then, at a signal to the pilot, our ship began to drop smoothly
downward, trailed by our forty-odd followers behind. Down, down, we sped,
slower and slower, until we suddenly started as there came from outside the
ship a highpitched hissing shriek.
"Air!" I cried. "This dark star has an atmosphere!
And 66 that light upon it-see!" And I flung a pointing hand toward the surface of the giant world below. For as we
dropped swifdy down toward that world we saw at last that the faint light which
illuminated it was not artificial light, or reflected light, but light inherent
in itself, since all the surface of the mighty sphere glowed with the same phosphorescent
light, its plains and hills and valleys alike feebly luminous, with the soft,
dim luminosity of radio-active minerals. A shining world, a world glowing eternally with cold white light, a luminous, titanic
sphere that rushed through the darkness of infinite space like some pale
gigantic moon. And upon the surface of the glowing plains beneath us rose dense
and twisted masses of dark leafless vegetation, distorted tree-growths and
tangles of low shrubs that were all of deepest black in color, springing out of
that glowing soil and twisting blackly and grotesquely above its feeble light,
stretching away over plain and hill and valley like the monstrous landscape of
some undreamed-of hell!
And
now, as our ship slanted down across the surface of the glowing sphere, there
gleamed ahead a deepening of that glow, a concentration of that feeble light
which grew stronger as we raced on toward it. And it was a city! A city whose
mighty buildings were each a truncated
pyramid in shape, towering into the air for thousands upon thousands of feet, a
city whose every building and street and square glowed with the same faint
white light as the ground upon which they stood, a metropolis out of nightmare,
the darkness of which was dispelled only by the light of its own great glowing
structures and streets. Far away stretched the mass of these structures, a
luminous mass which covered square mile upon square mile of the surface of this
glowing world, and far beyond them there lifted into the dusky air the shining
towers and pyramids of still other cities.
We straightened, trembling, turning toward
each other with white faces. And then, before any could speak, Dal Nara had
whirled to the window and uttered a hoarse shout. "Look!" she cried,
and pointed down and outward toward the titanic, glowing buildings of the city
ahead; for from their truncated summits were rising suddenly a swarm of long
black shapes, a horde of long black cones which were racing straight up toward
us.
I shouted an order to the pilot, and
instantly our ship was turning and slanting sharply upward, while around us our
cruisers sped up with us. Then, from beneath, there sped up toward us a shining
little cylinder of metal which j struck a cruiser racing beside our own. It
exploded instantly \ into a great flare of blinding light, enveloping the
cruiser it '1 had struck, and then the light had vanished,
while with it had vanished the ship it had enveloped. And from the ' cones beneath and beyond there leapt toward
us other of the metal cylinders, striking our ships now by the dozens, flaring
and vanishing with them in great, silent explosions of light.
"Etheric bombs!" I cried. "And our ship is the only battle-cruiser—the rest have no
weapons!"
I
turned, cried another order, and in obedience to it our own cruiser halted
suddenly and then dipped downward, racing straight into the ascending swarm of
attacking cones. Down we flashed, down, down, and toward us sprang a score of
the metal cylinders, grazing along our sides. And then, from the sides of our
own downward-swooping ship there sprang out brilliant shafts of green light,
the deadly de-cohesion ray of the ships of the Federation Fleet. It struck a
score of the cones beneath and they flamed with green light for an instant and
then flew into pieces, spilling downward in a great shower of tiny fragments as
the cohesion of their particles was destroyed by the deadly ray. And now our
cruiser had crashed down through the swarm of them and was driving down toward
the luminous plain below, then turning and racing sharply upward again while
from all the air around us the black cones swarmed to the attack.
Up, up, we sped, and now I saw that our blow
had been struck in vain, for the last of our ships above were vanishing beneath
the flares of the etheric bombs. One only of our cruisers remained, racing up
toward the zenith in headlong flight with a score of the great cones in hot
pursuit. A moment only I glimpsed this, and then we had turned once more and
were again diving down upon the attacking cones, while all around us the
etheric bombs filled the air with the silent, exploding flares. Again as we
swooped downward our green rays cut paths of annihilation across the swarming
cones
68
beneath;
and then I heard a cry from Hums Hoi, whirled to the
window and glimpsed above us a single great cone that was diving headlong down
toward us in a resistless, ramming swoop. I shouted to the pilot, sprang to the
controls, but was too late to ward off that deadly blow. There was a great
crash at the rear of our cruiser; it spun dizzily for a moment in midair, and
then was tumbling crazily downward like a falling stone toward the glowing
plain a score of miles below.
Ill
I think
now that our cruiser's
mad downward plunge must have lasted for minutes, at least, yet at the time it
seemed over in a single instant. I have a confused memory of the bridgeroom
spinning about us as we whirled down, of myself
throwing back the controls with a last, instinctive action, and then there came
a ripping, rending crash, a violent shock, and I was flung into a corner of the
room with terrific force.
Dazed by the swift action of the last few
minutes I lay there motionless for a space of seconds, then
scrambled to my feet. Hums Hoi and Dal Nara were staggering up likewise, the
latter hastening at once down into the cruiser's hull, but Nal Jak, the
wheelman, lay motionless against the wall, stunned by the shock. Our first act
was to bring him back to consciousness by a few rough first-aid measures, and
then we straightened and gazed about us.
Apparently
our cruiser's keel was resting upon the ground, but was tilted over at a sharp
angle, as the slant of the room's floor attested. Through the broad windows we
could see that around our prostrate ship lay a thick, screening grove of black
tree-growths which we had glimpsed from above, and into which we had crashed in
our mad plunge downward. As I was later to learn, it was only the shock-absorbing
qualities of the vegetation into which we had fallen, and my own last-minute
rush to the controls, which had slowed our fall enough to save us from
annihilation.
There
was a buzz of excited voices from the crew in the hull beneath us, and then I
turned at a sudden exclamation from Hums Hoi, to find him pointing up through
the ob-
69
servation
windows in the bridgeroom's ceiling. I glanced up, then
shrank back. For high above were circling a score or more of the long black
cones which had attacked us, and which were apparently surveying the landscape
for some clue to our fate. I gave a sharp catch of indrawn breath as they
dropped lower toward us, and we crouched with pounding hearts while they
dropped lower toward us, and while they dropped nearer. Then we uttered
simultaneous sighs of relief as the long shapes above suddenly drove back up
toward the zenith, apparently certain of our annihilation, massing and
wheeling and then speeding back toward the glowing city from which they had
risen to attack us.
We
rose to our feet again, and as we did so the door clicked open to admit Dal
Nara. She was a bruised, disheveled figure, like the rest of us, but there was
something like a grin on her face.
"That
cone that rammed us shattered two of our rear vibration-projectors," she
announced, "but that was all the damage. And outside of one man with a
broken shoulder the crew is all right."
"Good!" I exclaimed. "It won't
take long to replace the broken projectors."
She nodded. "I ordered them to put in
two of the spares," she explained. "But what
then?"
I considered for a moment. "None of our
other cruisers escaped, did they?" I asked.
Dal Nara slowly shook her head. "I don't
think so," she said. "Nearly all of them were destroyed in the first
few minutes. I saw Ship 16 racing up in an effort to escape, heading back
toward the Galaxy, but there were cones hot after it and it couldn't have got
away."
The quiet voice of Hums Hoi broke in upon us.
"Then we alone can take back word to the Federation of what is happening here,"
he said. His eyes suddenly flamed. "Two things we know, he exclaimed. "We know that this dark star's curving path through
space, which will bring it so fatally near to our own sun in passing, is a path
contrary to all the laws of astronomical science. And we know now, too, that
upon this dark star world, in those glowing cities yonder, live beings of some
sort who possess,
70
apparently, immense intelligence and power."
My
eyes met his. "You mean-" I began, but he interrupted swiftly.
"I
mean that in my belief the answer to this riddle lies in that glowing city
yonder, and that it is there we must go to find that answer."
"But how?" I asked. "If we'take the cruiser near it
they'll sight us and annihilate us."
"There
is another way," said Hurus Hoi. "We can leave the cruiser and its
crew hidden here, and approach the city on foot—get as near to it as
possible—learn what we can about it."
I
think that we all gasped at that suggestion, but as I quickly revolved it in my
mind I saw that it was, in reality, our only chance to secure any information
of value to take back to the Federation. So we adopted the idea without further
discussion and swiftly laid our plans for the venture. At first it was our plan
for only us three to go, but at Dal Nara's insistence we included the pilot in
our party, the more quickly because I knew her to be resourceful and
quick-witted.
Two hours we spent in sleep, at the
suggestions of Hurus Hoi, then ate a hasty meal and looked to our weapons,
small projectors of the decohesion ray similar to the great ray-tubes of the
cruiser. Already the ship's two shattered vibration-projectors had been
replaced by new spares, and our last order was for the crew and under-officers
to await our return without moving beyond the ship in any event. Then the
cruiser's hull-door snapped open and we four stepped outside, ready for our
venture.
The sandy ground upon which we stood glowed with
the feeble white light which seemed to emanate from all rock and soil on this
strange world, a weird light which beat upward upon us instead of down. And in
this light the twisted, alien forms of the leafless trees around us writhed
upward into the dusky air, their smooth black branches tangling and
intertwining far above our heads. As we paused there Hurus Hoi reached down for
a glowing pebble, which he examined intently for a moment.
"Radio-active," he commented. "All this glowing rock and 71 soil." Then he straightened, glanced around, and led the way unhesitatingly through the
thicket of black forest into which our ship had fallen.
Silently
we followed him, in single file, across the shining soil and beneath the
distorted arches of the twisted trees, until at last we emerged from the
thicket and found ourselves upon the open expanse of the glowing plain. It was
a weird landscape which met our eyes, a landscape of glowing plains and shallow
valleys patched here and there with the sprawling thickets of black forest, a
pale, luminous world whose faint light beat feebly upward into the dusky,
twilight skies above. In the distance, perhaps two miles ahead, a glow of
deeper light flung up against the hovering dusk from the massed buildings of
the luminous city, and toward this we tramped steadily onward, over the shining
plains and gullies and once over a swift little brook whose waters glowed as
they raced like torrents of rushing light. Within an hour we had drawn to
within a distance of five hundred feet from the outermost of the city's
pyramidal buildings, and crouched in a little clump of dark tree-growths,
gazing fascinatedly toward it.
The scene before us was one of unequaled
interest and activity. Over the masses of huge, shining buildings were flitting
great swarms of the long black cones, moving from roof to roof, while in the
shining streets below them moved other hordes of active figures, the people of
the city. And as our eyes took in these latter I think
that we all felt something of horror, in spite of all the alien forms which we
were familiar with in the thronging worlds of the Galaxy.
For in these creatures was no single point of
resemblance to anything human, nothing which the appalled intelligence could
seize upon as familiar. Imagine an upright cone of black flesh, several feet in
diameter and three or more in height, supported by a dozen-or more
smooth long tentacles which branched from its lower end—supple, boneless octopus-arms
which held the cone-body upright and which served both as arms and legs. And
near the top of that cone trunk were the only features, the twin tiny orifices
which were the ears and a single round and red-rimmed white eye, set between
them. Thus were these beings in appearance, black tentacle-creatures, moving in
unending swirling throngs
72
through
streets and squares and buildings of their glowing city.
Helplessly
we stared upon them, from our place of concealment. To venture into sight, I
knew, would be to court swift death. I turned to Hurus Hoi, then
started as there came from the city ahead a low, waxing sound-note, a deep,
powerful tone of immense volume which sounded out over the city like die blast
of a deep-pitched horn. Another note joined it, and another, until it seemed
that a score of mighty horns were calling across the city, and then they died
away. But as we looked now we saw that the shining streets were emptying,
suddenly, that the moving swarms of black tentacle-creatures were passing into
the pyramidal buildings, that the cones above were
slanting down toward the roofs and coming to rest. Within a space of minutes
the streets seemed entirely empty and deserted, and the only sign of activity
over all the city was the hovering of a few cones
that still moved restlessly above it. Astounded, we watched, and then the
explanation came suddenly to me.
"It's their sleep-period!" I cried.
"Their night! These things must rest, must sleep,
like any living thing, and as there's no night on this glowing world those
horn-notes must signal the beginning of their sleep-period."
Hurus Hoi was on his feet, his eyes suddenly
kindling. "It's a chance in a thousand to get inside the city!" he exclaimed.
The
next moment we were out of the shelter of our concealing trees and were racing
across the stretch of ground which separated us from the city. And five minutes
later we were standing in the empty, glowing streets, hugging closely the
mighty sloping walls of the huge buildings along it.
At once Hurus Hoi led the way directly down
the street toward the heart of the city, and as we hastened on beside him he
answered to my question, "We must get to the city's center. There's
something there which I glimpsed from our ship, and if it's what I think—"
He had broken into a run, now, and as we
raced together down the bare length of the great, shining avenue, I, for one,
had an unreassuring presentiment of what would
73
happen
should the huge buildings around us disgorge their occupants before we could
get out of the city. Then Hurus Hoi had suddenly stopped short, and at a motion
from him we shrank swiftly behind the corner of a pyramid's slanting walls.
Across the street ahead of us were passing a half-dozen of the
tentacle-creatures, gliding smoothly toward the open door of one of the great
pyramids. A moment we crouched, holding our breath, and then the things had
passed inside the building and the door had slid shut behind them. At once we
leapt out and hastened on.
We
were approaching the heart of the city, I judged, and ahead the broad, shining
street we followed seemed to end in a great open space of some sort. As we sped
toward it, between the towering luminous lines of buildings, a faint droning
sound came to our ears from ahead, waxing louder as we hastened on. The clear
space ahead was looming larger, nearer, now, and then as we raced past the last
great building on the street's length we burst suddenly into view of the
opening ahead and stopped, staring dumfoundedly toward it.
It
was no open plaza or square, but a pit—a shallow, circular pit not more than a
hundred feet in depth but all of a mile in diameter, and we stood at the rim or
edge of it. The floor was smooth and flat, and upon that floor there lay a
grouped mass of hundreds of half-globes or hemispheres, each fifty feet in
diameter, which were resting upon their flat bases with their curving sides
uppermost. Each of these hemispheres was shining with light, but it was very
different light from the feeble glow of the buildings and streets around us, an
intensely brilliant blue radiance which was all but blinding to our eyes. From
these massed, radiant hemispheres came the loud droning we had heard, and now
we saw, at the pit's farther edge, a cylindrical little room or structure of
metal which was supported several hundred feet above the pit's floor by a
single slender shaft of smooth round metal, like a great bird-cage. And toward
this cage-structure Hurus Hoi was pointing now, his eyes flashing.
"It's
the switch-board of the thing!" he cried. "And these 74 brilliant
hemispheres—the unheard-of space-path of this dark star—it's all clear now!
All—"
He
broke off, suddenly, as Nal Jak sprang back, uttering a cry and pointing
upward. For the moment we had forgotten the hovering cones above the city, and
now one of them was slanting swiftly downward, straight toward us.
We
turned, ran back, and the next moment an etheric bomb crashed down upon the
spot where we had stood, exploding silently in a great flare of light. Another
bomb fell and flared, nearer, and then I turned
with sudden fierce anger and aimed the little ray-projector in my hand at the
hovering cone above. The brilliant little beam cut across the dark shape; the
black cone hovered still for a moment, then crashed
down into the street to destruction. But now, from above and beyond, other
cones were slanting swiftly down toward us, while from the pyramidal buildings
beside us hordes of the black tentacle-creatures were pouring out in answer to
the alarm.
In a
solid, resistless swarm they rushed upon us. I heard a yell of defiance from
Dal Nara, beside me, the hiss of our rays as they clove through the black
masses in terrible destruction, and then they were upon us. A single moment we
whirled about in a wild mêlée of men and cone-creatures, of striking human
arms and coiling tentacles; then there was a shout of warning from one of my
friends, something hard descended upon my head with crushing force, and all
went black before me.
IV
Faint light was filtering through my eyelids when I came back to consciousness. As I opened them I sat weakly up, then fell back. Dazedly I gazed about me. I was lying in a
small, square room lit only by its own glowing walls and floor and ceiling, a
room whose one side slanted steeply upward and inward, pierced by a small barred
window that was the only opening. Opposite me I discerned a low door of metal
bars, or grating, beyond which lay a long, glowing-walled corridor. Then all
these things were suddenly blotted out by the anxious face of Hurus Hoi,
bending down toward me.
"You're awake!" he exclaimed, his
face alight. "You know < me, Ran Rarak?"
For
answer I struggled again to a sitting position, aided by the arm of Dal Nara,
who had appeared beside me. I felt strangely weak, exhausted, my head throbbing
with racing fires.
"Where
are we?" I asked, at last. "The fight in the city —I remember
that—but where are we now? And where's Nal Jak?"
The
eyes of my two friends met and glanced away, while I looked anxiously toward them. Then Hurus Hoi spoke slowly.
"We
are imprisoned in this little room in one of the great pyramids of the glowing
city," he said. "And in this room you have lain for weeks, Ran
Rarak."
"Weeks?" I gasped, and he nodded. "It's been almost ten weeks since we were
captured there in the city outside," he said, "and for all that time
you've lain here out of your head from that blow you received, sometimes
delirious and raving, sometimes completely unconscious. And in all that time
this dark star, this world, has been plunging on
through space toward our Galaxy, and our sun, and the theft and doom of that
sun. Ten more days and it passes our sun, stealing it from the Galaxy. And I,
who have learned at last what forces are behind it all, lie prisoned here.
"It was after we four were brought to
this cell, after our capture, that I was summoned before our captors, before a
council of those strange tentacle-creatures which was made up, I think, of
their own scientists. They examined me, my clothing, all about me, then sought to communicate with me. They did not
speak—communicating with each other by telepathy—but they strove to enter into
communication with me by a projection of pictures on a smooth wall, pictures
of their dark star world, pictures of our own Galaxy, our own sun—picture after
picture, until at last I began to understand the drift of them, the
history and the purpose of these strange beings and their stranger world.
"For
ages, I learned, for countless eons, their mighty sun had flashed through the
infinities of space, alone except for its numerous planets upon which had risen
these races of
76
tentacle-creatures. Their sun was flaming with life, then, and on their circling planets
they had attained to immense science, immense power, as their system rolled on,
a single wandering star, through the depths of uncharted space. But as the slow
eons passed, the mighty sun began to cool, and their planets to grow colder and
colder. At last it had cooled so far that to revive its dying fires they
dislodged one of their own planets from its orbit and sent it crashing into
their sun, feeding its waning flames. And when more centuries had passed and it
was again cooling they followed the same course, sending anouther planet into
it, and so on through the ages, staving off the death of their sun by
sacrificing their worlds, until at last but one planet was left to them. And
still their sun was cooling, darkening, dying.
"For further ages, though, they managed
to preserve a precarious existence on their single planet
by means of artificial heat-production, until at last their great sun had
cooled and solidified to such a point that life was possible upon its dark,
dead surface. That surface, because of the solidified radio-active elements in
it, shone always with pale light, and to it the races of the tentacle-creatures
now moved. By means of great air-current projectors they transferred the
atmosphere of their planet to the dark star itself and then cast loose their
planet to wander off into space by itself, for its orbit had become erratic and
they feared that it would crash into their own great dark star world, about
which it had revolved. But on the warm, shining surface of the great dark star
they now spread out and multiplied, raising their cities from its glowing rock
and clinging to its surface as it hurtled on and on and on through the dark
infinities of trackless space.
"But at last, after further ages of such
existence, the tentacle-races saw that again they were menaced with extinction,
since in obedience to. the inexorable laws of nature their dark star was
cooling still further, the molten fires at its center which warmed its surface
gradually dying down, while that surface became colder and colder. In a little while, they knew, the fires at its
center would be completely dead, and their great world would be a bitter,
frozen waste, unless they devised some plan by which to keep warm its surface.
"At this moment their astronomers came
forward with the announcement that their dark-star world, plunging on through
empty space, would soon pass a great star-cluster or Galaxy of suns at a
distance of some fifteen billion miles. They could not invade the worlds of
this Galaxy, they knew, for they had discovered that upon those worlds lived
countless trillions of intelligent inhabitants who would be able to repel
their own invasion, if they attempted it. There was but one expedient left,
therefore, and that was to attempt to jerk a sun out of this Galaxy as they
passed by it, to steal a star from it to take out with them into space, which
would revolve around their own mighty dark world and supply it with the heat
they needed.
"The sun which they fixed on to steal
was one at the Galaxy's very edge, our own sun. If they passed this at fifteen
billion miles, as their course then would cause them to do, they could do
nothing. But if they could change then-dark star's course, could curve inward
to pass this sun at some three billion miles instead of fifteen, then the powerful
gravitational grip of their own gigantic world would grasp this sun and carry
it out with it into space. The sun's planets, too, would be carried out, but
these they planned to crash into the fires of the sun
itself, to increase its size and splendor. All that was needed, therefore, was
some method of curving their world's course inward, and for this they had
recourse to the great gravity-condensers which they had already used to shift
their own planets.
"You
know that it is gravitational force alone which keeps the suns and planets to
their courses, and you know that the gravitational force of any body, sun or
planet, is radiated out from it in all directions, tending to pull all things
toward that body. In the same way there is radiated outward perpetually from
the Galaxy that combined attractive gravitational force of all its swarming
suns, and a tiny fraction of this outward-radiating force, of course, struck
the dark star, pulling it weakly toward the Galaxy. If more of that
outward-radiating force could strike the dark star, it would be pulled toward
the Galaxy with more power, would be pulled nearer toward the Galaxy's edge, as
it passed.
"It
was just that which their gravity-condenser accom-78 plished. In a low pit at
the heart of one of their cities— this city, in fact—they placed the condenser,
a mass of brilliant hemispherical ray-attracters which caused more of the
Galaxy's outward-shooting attractive force to fall upon the dark star, thereby
pulling the dark star inward toward the Galaxy's edge in a great curve. When
they reached a distance of three billion miles from the Galaxy's edge they
planned to turn off the great condenser, and their dark star would then shoot
past the Galaxy's edge, jerking out our sun with it, from that edge, by its own
terrific gravitational grip. If the condenser were turned off before they came
that close, however, they would pass the sun at a distance too far to pull it
out with them, and would then speed on out into space alone, toward the
freezing of their world and their own extinction. For that reason the
condenser, and the great cage-switch of the condenser, were guarded always by
hovering cones, to prevent its being turned off before the right moment.
"Since
then they have kept the great gravity-condenser in unceasing operation, and
their dark star has swept in toward the Galaxy's edge in a great curve. Back in
our own solar system I saw and understood what would be the result of that
inward curve, and so we came here—and were captured. And in those weeks since
we were captured, while you have lain here unconscious and raving, this dark
star has been plunging nearer and nearer toward our Galaxy and toward our sun.
Ten more days and it passes that sun, carrying it out with it into the darkness
of boundless space, unless the great condenser is turned off before then. Ten
more days, and we lie here, powerless to warn any of what forces work toward
the doom of our sun!"
There was a long silence when Hurus Hoi's
voice had ceased—a whispering, brain-crushing silence which I broke at last
with a single question.
"But Nal Jak—?" I asked, and the faces of my two companions
became suddenly strange, while Dal Nara turned away. At last Hurus Hoi spoke.
"It was after the tentacle-scientists
had examined me," he said gently, "that they brought Nal Jak down to examine. I think that they spared me for the time being
because
79
of my apparently greater knowledge, but Nal Jak
they— vivisected."
There
was a longer hush than before, one in which the brave, quiet figure of the
wheelman, a companion in all my service with the fleet, seemed to rise before
my suddenly blurring eyes. Then abruptly I swung down from the narrow bunk on which I lay, clutched dizzily at my companions for
support, and walked unsteadily to the square, barred little window. Outside and
beneath me lay the city of the dark-star people, a mighty mass of pyramidal,
glowing buildings, streets thronged with their dark, gliding figures, above
them the swarms of the racing cones. From our little window the glowing wall of
the great pyramid which held us slanted steeply down for fully five hundred
feet, and upward above us for twice that distance. And as I raised my eyes upward I saw, clear and bright above, a great,
far-flung field of stars—the stars of our own Galaxy toward which this world
was plunging. And burning out clearest among these the star
that was nearest of all, the shining yellow star that was our own sun.
I think now that it was the sight of that yellow
s'-ar, largening steadily as our dark star swept on toward it, which filled us
with such utter despair in the hours, the days, that followed. Out beyond the
city our cruiser lay hidden in the black forest, we knew, and could we escape
we might yet carry word back to the Federation of what was at hand, but escape
was impossible. And so, through the long days, days measurable only by our own
time-dials, we waxed deeper into an apathy of dull
despair.
Rapidly
my strength came back to me though the strange food supplied us once a day by
our captors was almost uneatable. But as the days fied by, my spirits sank
lower and lower, and less and less we spoke to each other as the doom of our
sun approached, the only change in any thing around us being the moment each
twenty-four hours when the signal-horns called across the city, summoning the
hordes in its streets to their four-hour sleep-period. At last, though, we woke
suddenly to realization of the fact that nine days had passed since my
awakening, and that upon the next day the dark star would be plunging past the
burning yellow star above us and jerking it into its grip. Then, at last, all
80
our
apathy dropped from us, and we raged against the walls of our cells with
insensate fury. And then, with startling abruptness, came the means of our
deliverance.
For hours there had been a busy clanging of
tools and machines somewhere in the great building above us, and numbers of the
tentacle-creatures had been passing our barred door carrying tools and
instruments toward some work being carried out overhead. We had come to pay but
little attention to them, in time, but as one passed there came
a sudden rattle and clang from outside, and turning to the door we saw that
one of the passing creatures had dropped a thick coil of slender metal chain
upon the floor and had passed on without noticing his loss.
In
an instant we were at the door and reaching through its bars toward the coil,
but through we each strained our arms in turn toward it the thing lay a few
tantalizing inches beyond our grasp. A moment we surveyed it, baffled, fearing
the return at any moment of the creature who had dropped it, and then Dal Nara,
with a sudden inspiration, lay flat upon the floor, tirrusting her leg out
through the grating. In a moment she had caught the coil with her foot, and in
another moment we had it inside examining it.
We
found that though it was as slender as my smallest finger the chain was of
incredible strength, and when we roughly estimated the extent of its
thick-coiled length we discovered that it would be more than long enough to
reach from our window to the street below. At once, therefore, we secreted the
thing in a corner of the room and impatiently awaited the sleep-period, when
we could work without fear of interruption.
At last, after what seemed measureless hours
of waiting, the great horns blared forth across the city outside, and swiftly
its streets emptied, the sounds in our building quieting until all was
silence, except for the humming of a few watchful cones above the great
condenser, and the deep droning of the condenser itself in the distance. At
once we set to work at the bars of our window.
Frantically we chipped at the rock at the
base of one of the metal bars, using the few odd bits of metal at our command,
but at the end of two hours had done no more
81
than
scratch away a bare inch of the glowing stone. Another hour and we had laid bare from the rock the lower end of the bar, but now we
knew that within minutes the sleep-period of the city outside would be ending,
and into the streets would be swarming its gliding throngs, making impossible
all attempts at escape. Furiously we worked, dripping now with sweat, until at
last when our time-dials showed that less than half an hour remained to us I gave over the chipping at the rock and wrapped our chain firmly around
the lower end of the bar we had loosened. Then stepping back into the cell and
bracing ourselves against the wall below the window, we pulled backward with
all our strength.
A
tense moment we strained thus, the thick bar holding fast, and then abruptly it
gave and fell from its socket in the wall to the floor, with a loud, ringing
clang. We lay in a heap
on the floor, panting and listening for any sound of alarm, then rose and
swiftly fastened the chain's end to one of the remaining bars. The chain itself
we dropped out of the window, watching it uncoil its length down the mighty
building's glowing side until its end trailed on the empty glowing street far
below. At once I motioned Hurus Hoi to the window, and in a
moment he had squeezed through its bars and was sliding slowly down the chain, hand under hand. Before he was ten feet down
Dal Nara was out and creeping downward likewise, and then I too squeezed
through the window and followed them, downward, the three of us crawling down
the chain along the huge building's steeply sloping side like three flies.
I
was ten feet down from the window, now, twenty feet, and glanced down toward
the glowing, empty street, five hundred feet below,
and seeming five thousand. Then, at a sudden sound from above me, I looked sharply up, and as I did so the most
sickening sensation of fear I had ever experienced swept over me. For at
the window we had just left, twenty feet above me, one of the
tentacle-creatures was leaning out, brought to our cell, I doubted not, by the metal bar's ringing fall,
his white, red-rimmed eye turned full upon me.
I heard sighs of horror from my two companions beneath me, and for a single moment we hung motionless along the
82
chain's
length, swinging along the huge pyramid's glowing side at a height of hundreds
of feet above the shining streets below. Then the creature raised one of its
tentacles, a metal tool in its grasp, which he brought down in a sharp blow on
the chain at the window's edge. Again he repeated the blow, and again.
He was cutting the chain!
V
For a space of seconds I hung motionless there, and then as the tool
in the grasp of the creature above came down on the chain in another sharp blow
the sound galvanized me into sudden action.
"Slide
on down!" I cried. They didn't, however, but followed me
up the chain, though Dal Nara and I alone came to grips with the horrible
dead-star creature. I gripped the links with frantic hands, pulling myself
upward toward the window and the creature at the window, twenty feet above me.
Three times the tool in his hand came down
upon the chain while I struggled up toward him, and each time I expected the strand to sever and send us down
to death, but the hard metal withstood the blows for the moment, and before he
could strike at it again I was up to the level of the window and
reaching up toward him.
As I did so, swift black tentacles thrust out and
gripped Dal Nara and me, while another of the snaky arms swept up with the tool
in its grasp for a blow on my head. Before it could fall, though, I had reached out with my right hand, holding
to the chain with my left, and had grasped the body of the thing inside the
window, pulling him outside before he had time to resist. As I did so my own hold slipped a little, so that
we hung a few feet below the window, both clinging to the slender chain and
both striking futilely at each other, he with the metal tool and I with my clenched fist.
A moment we hung there, swaying hundreds of
feet above the luminous stone street, and then the creature's tentacle coiled
swiftly around my neck, tightening, choking me.
83
Hanging
precariously to our slender strand with one hand I struck out blindly with the
other, but felt consciousness leaving me as that remorseless grip tightened.
Then with a last effort I gripped the chain firmly with
both hands, doubled my feet under me, and kicked out with all my strength. The
kick caught the cone-body of my opponent squarely, tearing him loose from his
own hold on the chain, and then there was a sudden wrench at my neck and I was
free of him, while beneath Dal Nara and I glimpsed his dark body whirling down
toward the street below, twisting and turning in its fall along the building's
slanting side and then crashing finally down upon the smooth, shining street
below, where it lay a black little huddled mass.
Hanging
there I looked down, panting, and saw that Hur-us Hoi
had reached the chain's bottom and was standing in the empty street, awaiting
us. Glancing up I saw that the blows of the creature I had fought had half
severed one of the links above me, but there was no time to readjust it; so
with a prayer that it might hold a few moments
longer Dal Nara and I began our slipping, sliding progress downward.
The sharp links tore our hands cruelly as we
slid downward, and once it seemed to me that the chain gave a little beneath
our weight. Apprehensively I looked upward, then down to where Hurus Hoi was
waving encouragement. Down, down we slid, not daring to look beneath again, not
knowing how near we might be to the bottom. Then there was another slight give
in the chain, a sudden grating catch, and abruptly the weakened link above
snapped and we dropped headlong downward—ten feet into the arms of Hurus Hoi.
A
moment we sprawled in a little heap there on the glowing street and then
staggered to our feet. "Out of the city!" cried Hurus Hoi. "We
could never get to the condenser-switch on foot—but in the cruiser there's a
chance. And we have but a few minutes now before the sleep-period ends!"
Down
the broad street we ran, now, through squares and avenues of glowing, mighty
pyramids, crouching down once as the ever-hovering cones swept by above, and
then racing on. At any moment, I knew, the great horns might blare across the
city, bringing its swarming thousands into its streets, and our only chance was
to win free of it before
84
that
happened. At last we were speeding down the street by which we had entered the
city, and before us lay that street's end, with beyond it the vista of black
forest and glowing plain over which we had come. And now we were racing over
that glowing plain, a quarter-mile, a half, a mile. . . .
Abruptly
from far behind came the calling, crescendo notes of the mighty horns, marking
the sleep-period's end, bringing back into the streets the city's
tentacle-people. It could be but moments now, we knew, before our escape was
discovered, and as we panted on at our highest speed we listened for the
sounding of the alarm behind us.
It
came! When we had drawn to within a half-mile of the black
forest where our cruiser lay hidden, another great tumult of horn-notes burst
out over the glowing city behind, high and shrill and raging. And
glancing back we saw swarms of the black cones rising
from the pyramidal buildings' summits, circling, searching, speeding out over
the glowing plains around the city, a compact mass of them racing straight
toward us.
"On!"
cried Hurus Hoi. "It's our last chance—to get to the cruiser!"
Staggering, stumbling, with the last of our
strength we sped on, over the glowing soil and rocks, toward the rim of the
black forest which lay now a scant quarter-mile ahead. Then suddenly Hurus Hoi
stumbled, tripped and fell. I halted, turned toward him, then
turned again as Dal Nara shouted thickly and pointed upward. We had been
sighted by the speeding cones above and two of them were driving straight down
toward us.
A moment we stood there, rigid, while the
great cones dipped toward us, waiting for the death that would crash down upon
us from them. Then suddenly a great dark shape loomed in the ah- above and
behind us, from which sprang out swift shafts of brilliant green light, the
dazzling de-cohesion ray, striking the two swooping cones and sending them down
in twin torrents of shattered wreckage. And now the mighty bulk behind us swept
swiftly down upon us, and we saw that it was our cruiser.
Smoodily it shot down to the ground, and we
stumbled 85 to its side, through the waiting open door. As I staggered up to
the bridgeroom the third officer was shouting in my ear. "We sighted you
from the forest," he was crying. "Came out in the cruiser to get
you—"
But
now I was in the bridgeroom, brushing the wheelman from the controls, sending
our ship slanting sharply up toward the zenith. Hurus Hoi was at my side, now,
pointing toward the great telechart and shouting something in my. ear. I glanced over, and my heart stood still. For the great
dark disk on the chart had swept down to within an inch of the shining line
around our sun-circle, the danger-line.
"The condenser!" I shouted. "We must get to that switch —turn it off! It's our only
chance!"
We
were racing through the air toward the luminous city, now, and ahead a mighty
swarm of the cones was gathering and forming to meet us, while from behind and
from each side came other swarms, driving on toward us. Then the door clicked
open and Dal Nara burst into the bridgeroom.
"The
ship's ray-tubes are useless!" she cried. "They've used the last
charge in the ray-tanks!"
At the cry the controls quivered under my
hands, the ship slowed, stopped. Silence filled the bridgeroom, filled all the
cruiser, the last silence of despair. We had failed. Weaponless our ship hung
there, motionless, while toward it from all directions leaped the swift and
swarming cones, in dozens, in scores, in hundreds, leaping toward us, long
black messengers of death, while on the great telechart the mighty dark star
leapt closer toward the shining circle that was our sun, toward the fateful fine
around it. We had failed, and death was upon us.
And now the black swarms of the cones were
very near us, and were slowing a little, as though fearing some ruse on our
part, were slowing but moving closer, closer, while we awaited them in a last
utter stupor of despair. Closer they came, closer, closer. . . .
A ringing, exultant cry suddenly sounded from
somewhere in the cruiser beneath me, taken up by a sudden babel of voices, and
then Dal Nara cried out hoarsely, beside me, and pointed up through our upper
observation-windows toward a long, shining, slender shape that was driving
86
down
toward us out of the upper air, while behind it drove a vast swarm of other and
larger shapes, long and black and mighty.
"It's
our own ship!" Dal Nara was shouting, insanely. "It's Ship 16! They
escaped, got back to the Galaxy—and look there—behind them—it's the fleet, the
Federation fleet!"
There
was a wild singing of blood in my ears as I looked up, saw the mighty swarm of
black shapes that were speeding down upon us behind the shining cruiser, the
five thousand mighty battle-cruisers of the Federation fleet.
The
fleet! The massed fighting-ships of the Galaxy, cruisers from Antares and
Sirius and Regulus and Spica, the keepers of the Milky Way patrol, the picked
fighters of a universe! Ships with which I had cruised from
Arcturus to Deneb, beside which I had battled in many an interstellar fight.
The fleet! They were straightening, wheeling, hovering, high above us, and then
they were driving down upon the massed swarms of cones around us in one
titanic, simultaneous swoop.
Then
around us the air flashed brilliant with green ray and bursting flares, as
de-cohesion rays and etheric bombs crashed and burst from ship to ship.
Weaponless our cruiser hung there, at the center of that gigantic battle, while
around us the mighty cruisers of the Galaxy and the long black cones of the
tentacle-people crashed and whirled and flared, swooping and dipping and racing
upon each other, whirling down to the glowing world below in scores of
shattered wrecks, vanishing in silent flares of blinding light. From far away
across the surface of the luminous world beneath, the great swarms of cones
drove on toward the battle, from the shining towers of cities far away, racing
fearlessly to the attack, sinking and falling and crumbling beneath the
terrible rays of the leaping ships above, ramming and crashing with them to the
ground in sacrificial plunges. But swiftly, now, the cones were vanishing
beneath the brilliant rays.
Then Hums Hoi was at my side, shouting and
pointing down toward the glowing city below. "The condenser!" he
cried, pointing to where its blue radiance still flared on. "The
dark star—look!" He flung a hand toward the telechart, where the
dark star disk was but a scant half-inch from
87
the
shining line around our sun-circle, a tiny gap that was swiftly closing. I
glanced toward the battle that raged around us, where the Federation cruisers
were sending the cones down to destruction by swarms, now, but unheeding of the
condenser below. A bare half-mile beneath us lay that
condenser, and its cage-pillar switch, which a single shaft of the green ray
would have destroyed instantly. And our ray-tubes were useless!
The
wild resolve flared up in my brain and I slammed down the levers in my hands,
sent our ship racing down toward the condenser and its upheld cage like a
released thunderbolt of hurtling metal. "Hold tight!" I screamed as we thundered down. "I'm going to ram the switch!"
And
now up toward us were rushing the brilliant blue hemispheres of the pit, the
great pillar and upheld cage beside them, toward which we flashed with the
speed of lightning. CrashI—
and a tremendous shock
shook the cruiser from stem to stern as its prow tore through the upheld metal
cage, ripping it from its supporting pillar and sending it crashing to the
ground. Our cruiser spun, hovered for a moment as though to whirl down to
destruction, then steadied, while we at the window gazed downward, shouting.
For beneath us the blinding radiance of the
massed hemispheres had suddenly snapped out! Around and above us the great
battle had died, the last of the cones tumbling to the ground beneath the rays
of the mighty fleet, and now we turned swiftly to the telechart. Tensely we
scanned it. Upon it the great dark-star disk was creeping still toward the line
around our sun-circle, creeping slower and slower toward it but still moving
on, on, on. . . . Had we lost, at the last moment? Now the black disk, hardly
moving, was all but touching the shining line, separated from it by only a
hair's-breadth gap. A single moment we watched while it
hovered thus, a moment in which was settled the destiny of a sun. And
then a babel of incoherent cries came from our lips.
For the tiny gap was widening!
The. black disk was moving back, was curving outward again from
our sun and from the Galaxy's edge, curving out once more into the blank depths
of space whence it had come, without the star it had planned to steal. Out,
out, out—and we knew, at last, that we had won.
88
And the mighty fleet of ships around us knew,
from their own charts. They were massing around us and hanging motionless
while beneath us the palely glowing gigantic dark star swept on, out into the
darkness of trackless space until it hung like a titanic feeble moon in the
heavens before us, retreating farther and farther from the shining stars of our
Galaxy, carrying with it the glowing cities and the hordes of the
tentacle-peoples, never to return. There in the bridge-room, with our massed
ships around us, we three watched it go, then turned back toward our own yellow
star, serene and far and benignant, that yellow star around which swung our own
eight little worlds. And then Dal Nara flung out a hand toward it, half weeping
now.
"The
sun!" she cried. "The sun! The good old sun, that we fought for and saved! Our sun, till the end of time!"
VI
It was on a night a week later that Dal Nara and I said farewell to Hurus Hoi, standing on the
roof of that same great building on Neptune from which we had started with our
fifty cruisers weeks before. We had learned, in that week, how the only
survivor of those cruisers, Ship 16, had managed to shake off the pursuing
cones in that first fierce attack and had sped back to the Galaxy to give the
alarm, of how the mighty Federation fleet had raced through the Galaxy from
beyond Antares in answer to that alarm, speeding out toward the approaching
dark star and reaching it just in time to save our own ship, and our sun.
The other events of that week, the honors
which had been loaded upon us, I shall not attempt to describe. There was
little in the solar system which we three could not have had for the asking, but
Hurus Hoi was content to follow the science that was his life-work, while Dal
Nara, after the manner of her sex through all the ages, sought a beauty parlor,
and I asked only to continue with our cruiser in the service of the Federation
fleet. The solar system was home to us, would always be home to us, but never, I knew, would either of us be able to break
away from the fascination of the great fleet's interstellar patrol, the
flashing from sun to sun,
89
the
long silent hours in cosmic night and stellar glare. We would be star-rovers,
she and I, until the end.
So
now, ready to rejoin the fleet, I stood on the great building's roof, the
mighty black bulk of our cruiser behind us and the stupendous canopy of the
Galaxy's glittering suns over our heads. In the streets below, too, were other
lights, brilliant flares, where thronging crowds still celebrated the escape of
their worlds. And now Hurus Hoi was speaking, more moved than ever I had seen
him.
"If Nal Jak were here—" he said,
and we were all silent for a moment. Then his hand came out toward us and
silently we wrung it, turning toward the cruiser's door.
As
it slammed shut behind us we were ascending to the bridgeroom, and from there
we glimpsed now the great roof dropping away beneath us as we slanted up from
it once more, the dark figure of Hurus Hoi outlined for a moment at its edge
against the lights below, then vanishing. And the world beneath us was shrinking, vanishing once more, until at last of all the
solar system behind us there was visible only the single yellow spark that was
our sun.
Then
about our outward-racing cruiser was darkness, the infinite void's eternal
night—night and the unchanging, glittering hosts of wheeling, flaming stars.
WITHIN THE NEBULA
I
Standing at the controls, beside me, the silent steersman
raised his hand for a moment to point forward through the pilot room's
transparent wall.
"Canopus at last," he said, and I
nodded. Together, and in silence, we gazed ahead.
Before and around us there stretched away the
magnificent panorama of interstellar space, familiar enough to our eyes but
ever new, a vast reach of deep black sky dotted thickly with the glittering
hosts of stars. The blood-red of Antares, the pale green of great Sirius, the
warm, golden light of Capella, they flamed in the firmament about us like
spendid jewels of light. And dead ahead there shone the
90
one orb
that dwarfed and dimmed all the others, a titanic radiant white sun whose
blazing circle seemed to fill the heavens before us, the mighty star of
Canopus, vastest of all the Galaxy's thronging suns.
For
all that I had visited it many times before, it was
with something of awe that I contemplated the great white sun, as our ship
flashed on toward it. Its colossal blazing bulk, I knew, was greater far than
the whole of our own little solar system, millions of times larger than our own
familiar little star, infinitely the most glorious of all the swarming suns. It
seemed fitting, indeed, that at Canopus had been located the seat of the great
Council of Suns of which I was myself a member, representing our own little
solar system in that mighty deliberative body whose members were drawn from
every peopled star.
In thoughtful silence I gazed toward the
mighty sun ahead, and for a time there was no sound in the bridgeroom except
for the deep humming of the ship's generators, whose propulsion-vibrations
flung us on through space. Then, against the dazzling glare of the gigantic
star ahead, there appeared a tiny black dot, expanding swiftly in size as we
raced on toward it. Around and beyond it other dots were coming into view,
also, changing as we flashed on to disks, to globes, to huge and swarming
planets that spun in vast orbits about their mighty parent sun. And it was
toward the largest and inmost of these whirling worlds, the seat of the great
Council, that our ship was now slanting swiftly downward.
Beneath us I could see the great planet
rapidly expanding and broadening, until its tremendous coppery sphere filled
all the heavens below. By that time our velocity had slackened to less than a
light-speed, and even this speed decreased still further as we entered the
zone of traffic about the great planet. For a few moments we dropped cautiously
downward through the swarming masses of interstellar ships which jammed the
upper levels, and then had swept past the busy traffic-boats into one of the
great descension-lanes, and were moving smoothly down toward the planet's
surface.
Around us there swarmed all the myriads of
inbound ships that filled the descension-lane, drawn from every
91
quarter of
the Galaxy toward Canopus, the center and capital of our universe. Long cargo-ships
from far Spica there were, laden with all the strange merchandise of that sun's
circling worlds; luxurious passenger-liners from Regulus and Altair, filled
with tourists eager for their first sight of great Canopus; swift little boats
from the thronging suns and worlds of the great Hercules cluster; battered
tramps which owned no sun as home, but cruised eternally through the Galaxy,
carrying chance cargoes from star to star; and here and there among the swarms
of alien ships a human-manned craft from our own distant little solar system.
All these and a myriad others raced smoothly beside and around us as we shot
down toward the mighty world beneath.
Swiftly, though, the traffic about us
branched away and thinned as we dropped nearer to the planet's surface. Beneath
the light of the immense white sun above, its landscape lay
clearly revealed, a far-sweeping panorama of smoothly sloping plains and
valleys, parklike in its alternation of lawn and forest. Here and there on the
surface of this world sprawled its shining cities, over whose streets and
towers our cruiser sped as we flashed on. Then, far ahead, a single mighty
gleaming spire became visible against the distant horizon, growing as we sped
on toward it into a colossal tower all of two thousand feet square at its base,
and which aspired into the radiant sunlight for fully ten thousand feet. On
each side of it there branched away a curving line of smaller buildings, huge
enough in themselves but dwarfed to toylike dimensions by the looming grandeur
of the stupendous tower. And it was down toward the smooth sward at the
tower's base that our ship was slanting now, for this was the seat of the great
Council of Suns itself.
Down we sped toward the mighty structure's
base, down over the great buildings on either side which housed the different
departments of the Galaxy's government, down until our ship had come smoothly
to rest on the ground a hundred feet from the tower itself. Then the ship's
hull-door was clanging open, and a moment later I had stepped onto the ground
outside and was striding across the smooth sward toward the mighty tower.
Through its high-arched doorway I passed, and down the tremendous corridor inside
toward the huge doors at its end, which automatically
92
slid
smoothly sidewise as I approached. The next moment I had passed through them and stood in the Hall
of the Council itself.
Involuntarily,
as always, I paused on entering, so breathtaking was the
immensity of the place. A single vast circular room, with a diameter of near
two thousand feet, it covered almost all the mighty tower's first floor. From
the edge of the great circle the room's floor sloped gently down toward its
center, like a vast shallow bowl, and at the center stood the small black
platform of the Council Chief. Out from that platform back clear to the great
room's towering walls were ranged the countless rows of seats, just filling now
with the great Council's thousands of members.
Beings
there were among those thousands from every peopled sun in all the Galaxy's
hosts, drawn here like myself each to represent his star in this great Council
which ruled our universe. Creatures there were utterly weird and alien in
appearance, natives of the whirling worlds of the Galaxy's farthest
stars—creatures from Aldebaran, turtle-men of the amphibian races of that star;
fur-covered and slow-moving beings from the planets of dying Betelgeuse; great
octopus-creatures from mighty Vega; invertebrate insect-men from the races of
Procyon; strange, dark-winged bat-folk from the weird worlds of Deneb; these,
and a thousand others, were gathered in that vast assemblage, forms utterly
different from each other physically, but able to mix and understand each other
on the common plane of intelligence.
Within another moment I had passed down the broad aisle and had
slipped into my own seat, and now I saw that on the black platform at the room's
center there stood silent the Council Chief. A strange enough figure he made,
for he was of the races of Canopus, natives of this giant star-system, a great,
unhuman head with no body and with but a single staring eye, carrying himself
on tiny, pipe-stem limbs. Silently he stood there, contemplating the gathering
members. Within another minute all had taken their seats, and then a sudden
hush swept over them as the Council Chief stepped forward and began to speak,
in the tongue that has become universal throughout the Galaxy, his strange,
high voice carried to every end of the vast room by the
93
great amplifiers which make every whisper in it
clearly heard.
"Members
of the Council," he said, "I have called this meeting, have summoned
you here to Canopus, each from his native star, because I have to place before
you a matter of the utmost importance. I have summoned you here because there
has risen to face us the most vital problem that has yet confronted us in our
government of the Galaxy— the greatest and most terrible danger, in fact, that
has ever threatened our universe!
"Other dangers, other problems, have
faced us in the past, and all these we have overcome, by massing all our
knowledge and science, have ruled with more and more power over the inanimate
matter of our universe, our Galaxy. We have saved planets and their peoples
from extinction, by shifting them from dying old suns to flaming new ones. We
have succeeded in breaking up and annihilating some of the great comets whose
headlong flights were carrying destruction across the Galaxy. We have even
dared to change the course' of suns, to prevent collisions between them that
would have annihilated their circling worlds. It might seem, indeed, that we,
the massed peoples of the Galaxy, have risen to such power that all things in
it are subject to our will, obedient to our commands. But we have not. One
thing alone in the Galaxy remains beyond our power to change or alter, one thing beside which all our power and our science
are as nothing. And that is the nebula.
"A nebula is the vastest thing in all our universe, and the most mysterious. A gigantic mass of glowing gas that stretches across countless
billions of miles of space, its mighty bulk flames in the heavens like a
universe on fire. Beside its vast dimensions all the suns of the Galaxy
are but as sparks beside a great, consuming blaze. Here and there in our Galaxy
lie these mighty mysteries, these flaming nebulae, and mightiest of all is that
one which we call the Orion Nebula, that gigantic globe of flaming gas which
measures light-years in diameter, burning in giant splendor at the Galaxy's
heart. We know that the great nebula is growing slowly smaller, that through
the eons it contracts to form new blazing stars, but what its constitution may
be, what mysteries it may hide, has never been known, since it would be
annihilation for any ship to approach too near
94
to its
fiery splendor, and all our interstellar traffic has de-toured always far
around its flaming mass. Because of that inaccessibility no large attention has ever been paid to the great nebula, nor would there be
now, had not something been discovered but now by our scientists regarding it
which seems to herald the end of our universe.
"As
I have said, this nebula, this gigantic globe of flaming gas, lies practically
motionless in space at the heart of our Galaxy. A few weeks ago, however, it
was discovered by our astronomers that the great flaming sphere of the nebula
had begun slowly to revolve, to spin, and that as the days went by it was
spinning faster and faster. Through the weeks since then our astronomers have
watched it closely, and ever faster it has spun, until now it is revolving at a
terrific rate, a rate that is still steadily increasing. And that accelerating
spin of the huge nebula must result, inevitably, in the doom of our universe.
"For our scientists have calculated that
within two more weeks the nebula's rate of spin will have become so great that
it will no longer be able to hold together, that it will disintegrate, break
up, its gigantic masses of incandescent gases flying off in all directions like
the pieces of a bursting fly-wheel. And those colossal clouds of flaming gas,
flying out through our Galaxy, our universe, will inevitably sweep over and
destroy countless thousands of our suns and worlds, annihilating the worlds
like midgets in candle-flame, changing the suns into nebulous masses of
flaming gas like themselves, smashing gigantically through and across the
Galaxy and destroying the gravitational balance of its whirling suns and worlds
until in a great chaos of crashing stars and planets our universe ends as a
vast, cosmic wreck, our organizations and our civilizations gone
forever!"
The Council Chief paused for a moment, and in
that moment there was silence over all the great hall,
a silence unnatural, terrible, unbroken by any slightest sound. I saw •the
members about me leaning forward, gazing tensely toward the Council Chief, and
when he spoke again his words seemed to come to us through that strained
silence as though from some remoteness of distance.
"Terrible
as this peril is," he was saying, "we must face it. Flight is
impossible, for where could we flee? We have but
95
one
chance to save ourselves, our universe, and that is to halt the spinning of the
great nebula before the few days left us have passed, before this cosmic
cataclysm takes place. Some extraordinary force or forces have set the great
nebula to spinning thus, and if we could venture out to the nebula, discover
the nature of those forces, we might be able to counteract them, to stop the
nebula's spin and save our suns and worlds.
"It
is impossible, of course, for any of our ordinary interstellar ships to attempt
this, since any that approached the great nebula would perish instantly in its
flaming heat. It chances, however, that some of our scientists here have been
working for months on the problem of devising new heat-resistant materials,
materials capable of resisting temperatures which would destroy other
substances. They have worked on the principle that heat-resistance is a matter
of atomic structure. Steel, for instance, resists heat and fire better than
wood because its atomic structure, and arrangement of its atoms, is more
stable, less easily broken up. And following this principle they have devised a
new metallic compound or alloy whose atomic structure is infinitely more stable
than that of any material known to us previously, and which is able to resist
temperatures of thousands of degrees.
"Of this heat-resistant material an interstellar cruiser was
constructed, a cruiser which could venture into regions of heat where other
ships would perish instantly. It had been the intention to use this cruiser to explore solar coronas,
but at my order it has been brought here to the Council Hall, equipped for
action. For it is my intention to use this cruiser to venture out close to the
great nebula's flaming fires, which it alone can do, and make a last effort to
discover and counteract whatever force or forces there are causing the
accelerating spin of the nebula that means doom to us.. The cruiser itself is
not a large one, and with its present equipment can hold but three for this
trip, three on whom must rest all the chances for
escape of our universe. And these three I intend to choose now from among you,
three whose past careers and interstellar experience make them best fitted for
this hazardous and all-important trip."
He
paused again, and over the massed members there 96 swept now a whisper of
excitement, a low babel of a thousand unlike voices that stilled suddenly as
the Council Chief again spoke, his high, clear voice sounding across the great
room like a whipcrack. "Sar Than of
Arcturus!"
As
he called the name a single figure rose from among the members to my left, a
bulbous body supported above the ground by four powerful thick tentacles of
muscle which served both as arms and legs, while set upon the body was the
round, neckless head, with its two quick, intelligent eyes and narrow mouth. A moment the Arcturian paused on rising, then stepped out
into the aisle and down toward the central platform. And now the voice of the
Council Chief cut again across the rising clamor of the members.
"Jor
Dahat of Capella!"
Before
me now another figure rose, one of the strange plant-men of Capella, of the
people who had evolved to intelligence and power from the lower plant-races
there; his body an upright cylinder of smooth, fibrous flesh, supported by two
short, thick legs and with a pair of powerful upper arms, above which was the
conical head whose two green-pupiled eyes and close-set ears and mouth
completed the figure. In a moment he too had strode down toward the platform,
and then, over the tumultuous shouts of those in the great hall, which had
risen now to a steady roar of voices, there came the clear voice of the Council
Chief, with the third name.
"Ker
Kal of Sun-828!"
For
a moment I sat silent, my brain whirling, the words of
the Council Chief drumming in my ears, and then heard the excited voices of the
members about me, felt myself stumbling to my feet and down the aisle in turn
toward the platform. Beating in my dazed ears now was the tremendous shouting
clamor of all the gathered members, and beneath that surging thunder of
thousands of voices I sensed but dimly the things about me, the Arcturian and
Capellan beside me, the figure of the Council Chief on the platform beyond
them. Then I saw the latter raise a slender arm, felt the uproar about me
swiftly diminishing, until complete si-
97
lence
reigned once more. And then the Council Chief was speaking
again, this time to us.
"Sar
Than, Jor Dahat and Ker Kal," he addressed us, "you three are chosen
to go where only three can go, to approach the nebula and make a final effort
to discover and counteract whatever force or forces there are causing this
cataclysm that threatens us. Your cruiser is ready and you will start at once,
and to you I have no orders to give, no instructions, no advice. My only word
to you is this: If you fail in this mission, where failure seems all but
inevitable, indeed, our Galaxy meets its doom, die
countless trillions of our races their deaths, the civilizations we have built
up in millions of years annihilation. But if you succeed, if you find what
forces have caused the spinning of the mighty nebula and are able to halt that
spin, then your names shall not die while any in the Galaxy live. For then you
will have done what never before was done or dreamed of, will have stayed with
your hands a colossal cosmic wreck, will have saved a universe itself from
death!"
II
As the
door of the little pilot
room clicked open behind me I half turned from my position at the controls, to
see my two companions enter. And as the Arcturian and Capellan stepped over to
my side I nodded toward the broad fore-window.
"Two more hours and we'll be there,"
I said.
Side
by side we three gazed ahead. About us once more there stretched the utter
blackness of the great void, ablaze with its jeweled suns. Far behind shone the
brilliant white star that was Canopus, and to our right the great twin suns of
Castor and Pollux, and above and beyond them the
yellow spark that was the sun of my own little solar system. On each side and
behind us hung the splendid starry canopy, but ahead it was blotted out by a
single vast circle of glowing light that filled the heavens before us, titanic,
immeasurable, the mighty nebula that was our goal.
For more than ten days we had watched the
vast 98 globe of flaming gas largening across the heavens as we raced on toward
it, in the heat-resistant cruiser that had been furnished us by the Council.
Days they were in which our generators had hummed always at their highest
power, propelling our craft forward through space with the swiftness of
thought, almost—long, changeless days in which the alternate watches in the
pilot room and the occasional inspection of the throbbing generators had formed
our only occupations.
On
and on and on we had flashed, past sun after sun, star system after star
system. Many times we had swerved from our course as our meteorometers warned
us of vast meteor swarms ahead, and more than once we
had veered to avoid some thundering dark star which our charts showed near us,
but always the prow of our craft had swung back toward the great nebula. Ever
onward toward it we had raced, day after day, watching its glowing sphere widen
across the heavens, until now at last we were drawing within sight of our
journey's end, and were flashing over the last few billions of miles that
separated us from our goal.
And now, as we drew thus nearer toward the
nebula's fiery mass, we saw it for the first time in all its true grandeur. A
vast sphere of glowing light, of incandescent gases, it flamed before us like
some inconceivably titanic sun, reaching from horizon to horizon, stunning in
its very magnitude. Up and outward from the great fiery globe
there soared vast tongues of flaming gas, mighty prominences of incalculable
length, leaping out from the gigantic spinning sphere. For the sphere,
the nebula, was spinning. We saw that, now, and could
mark the turning of its vast surface by the position of those leaping tongues,
and though that turning seemed slow to our eyes by reason of the nebula's very
vastness, we knew that in reality it was whirling at a terrific rate.
For a long time there was silence in the
little pilot room while we three gazed ahead, the glowing light from the vast
nebula before us beating in through the broad window and illuminating all about
us in its glare. At last Sar Than, beside me,
spoke.
"One sees now why no interstellar ship
has ever dared 99 to approach the nebula," he said, his
eyes on the colossal sea of flame before us.
I
nodded at the Arcturian's comment. "Only our own ship would dare to come
as close as we are now," I told him. "The temperature outside is
hundreds of degrees, now." And I pointed toward a dial that recorded the
outside heat.
"But
how near can we go to it?" asked Jor Dahat. "How much heat can our cruiser stand?"
"Some
thousands of degrees," I said, answering the plant-man's last question
first. "We can venture within a few thousand miles of the nebula's
surface without danger, I think. But if we were to go farther, if we were to
plunge into its fires, even our ship could not resist the tremendous heat there
for long, and would perish in a few minutes. We will be able, though, to skim
above the surface without danger."
"You plan to do that, to search above
the nebula's surface for the forces that have set it spinning?" asked the
Capellan, and I nodded.
"Yes. There may be great ether-currents
of some kind there which are responsible for this spin, or perhaps other forces
of which we know nothing. If we can only find what is causing it, there will be
at least a chance—" And I was silent, gazing thoughtfully toward the
far-flung raging fires ahead.
Now, as our ship raced on toward that mighty
ocean of flaming gas, the pointer on the outside-heat dial was creeping
steadily forward, though the ship's interior was but slightly warmer, due to
the super-insulation of its walls. We were passing into a region of heat, we
knew, that would have destroyed any ship but our own, and that thought held us
silent as our humming craft raced on. And now the sky before us, a single vast
expanse of glowing flame, was creeping downward across our vision as the
cruiser's bow swung up. Minutes more, and the whole vast flaming nebula lay
stretched beneath us, instead of before us, and then we were dropping smoothly
down toward it.
Down we fell, my hand on the control lever
gradually decreasing our speed, now moving at a single lightspeed, now at half
of that, and still slower and slower, until at last
100
our
craft hung motionless a scant thousand miles above the nebula's flaming
surface, a tiny atom in size compared to the colossal universe of the fire
above which it hovered. For from horizon to horizon beneath us, now, stretched
the nebula, in terrible grandeur. Its flaming sea, we saw, was traversed by
great waves and currents, currents that met here and there in gigantic fiery maelstroms,
while far across its surface we saw, now and then, great leaping prominences of
geysers of flaming gas, that towered for an instant to
immense heights and then rushed back down into the fiery sea beneath. To us,
riding above that burning ocean, it seemed at that moment that in all the universe was only flame and gas, so brain-numbing
was the fiery nebula's magnitude.
Hanging there in our little cruiser we stared
down at it, the awe we felt reflected in each other's eyes. I saw now by the
dial that the temperature about us was truly terrific, over a thousand degrees,
and what it might be in the raging fires below I could not guess. But nowhere
was there any sign of what might have set the great nebula to spinning, for our
instruments recorded no ether-disturbances around the surface, nor any other
phenomena which might give us a clue. And, looking down, I think that we all
felt, indeed, that nothing was in reality capable of affecting in any way this
awesome nebula, the vastest thing in all our universe. *
At last I turned to the others. "There's
nothing here," I said. "Nothing to show what's
caused the nebula's spinning. We must go on, across its surface—"
With the words I reached forward toward the
control levers, then abruptly whirled around as there came a sudden cry from
Sar Than, at the window.
"Look!" cried the Arcturian,
pointing down through the window, his eyes staring. "Below us—look!"
I gazed down, then
felt the blood drive from my heart at what I saw. For directly beneath us one
of the vast prominences of flaming gas was suddenly shooting up from the
nebula's surface, straight toward us, a gigantic tongue of fire beside which
our ship was but as a midge beside a great blaze. I shouted, sprang to the
control, but even as I laid hands on the levers there was a tremendous rush of
blinding flame all about our ship, and then we three had
101
been
flung violently into a corner of the pilot room and the cruiser was being
whirled blindly about with lightning speed by the vast current of flaming gas
that had gripped it.
All
about us was the thunderous roaring of the fires that held us, and now as we
sprawled helpless on the room's floor I sensed that our ship was falling,
plunging down with the downward-sinking geyser of flame that held it.
Struggling to gain my feet, while the pilot room spun dizzily about me, I
glimpsed through the shifting fires outside the window the nebula's flaming
surface, just below us, a raging sea of fiery gas toward which we were dropping
plummetlike. Then, as a fresh gyration of the plunging ship flung me once more
to the floor, I heard the thundering roar about us suddenly intensified,
terrible beyond expression, while now through the window was visible only a
single solid mass of blinding flame, and while our cruiser at the same moment
rocked and whirled crazily beneath the impetus of a dozen different forces. And
as understanding of what had happened flashed across my brain I cried out
hoarsely to my two companions.
"The nebula!" I cried. "The current that held us has
sucked us down into the nebula itself!'"
All
about us now was only one tremendous sheet of fire, whose heat was rapidly
penetrating through even our heat-resistant walls and windows. Swiftly the air
in the little pilot room was becoming hot, suffocating, and already the walls
were burning to the touch. The ship, I knew, could not stand such heat for many
minutes more, yet every moment was taking us farther into the nebula's fiery
depths, whirling us wildly on with velocity inconceivable. Borne by its mighty
interior currents we were sweeping on and on into that universe of flame, its
vast fires roaring about us like the thunder of doom, deafening, awful, a
cosmic, bellowing clamor that was like the mighty shouting of a universe rnade
vocal.
On and on it roared, about us, and on and on
we whirled into the depths of those mighty fires, toward our doom. The air had
become stifling, unbreathable, and the walls were beginning to glow dully. Now,
with a last effort, I dragged myself from support to support until I had
clutched the control levers, opening them to the last notch. Yet
102
though
the generators beneath hummed with highest power it was as though they were
silent, for in the grip of the nebula's giant fire-currents the cruiser plunged
madly on. And as its whirling catapulted me again to the room's corner, where
my two companions clung, I felt my lungs scorching with each panting breath,
felt my senses leaving me.
Then,
through the unconsciousness that was creeping upon me, I heard a grating wrench
from somewhere in the cruiser's walls, a loud and ominous cracking, and knew
that under the terrific fires around us those walls were already warping,
giving way. Another wrenching crack came, and another, sounding loud in my ears
above the thunderous roar of the flames about us. In a moment the walls would
give completely, and in the rushing fires of the nebula about us we would meet
the end. In a moment—
But what was that? The thunderous clamor
about us had suddenly dwindled, ceased, and at the same moment our ship had
righted itself, was humming serenely on. Slowly I raised my head, then stared in utter astonishment. The fires outside the
windows, the terrific sea of flame about us, had vanished, and we were again
flashing on through open space. And now Jor Dahat beside me had seen also, and
was rising to his feet.
"We're out of the nebula!" he
cried. "That current must have taken us back up to the surface—back out
into space again—"
He was at the window now, gazing eagerly out,
while I struggled up in turn. And as I did so I saw awe falling upon his face
as he gazed, and heard from him a whispered exclamation of utter astonishment.
Then I, too, was on my feet, with Sar Than, and we
were at the window beside him, staring forth in turn.
My first impression was of vast space, a colossal reach of space that stretched far away before us, and into
which our ship was racing on. And then I saw, with sudden awe and wonder, that
this vast space was not the unlimited, unbounded space we were accustomed to,
but was limited, was bounded, bounded by a colossal sheet of flowing flame that
hemmed it in in all directions. Above and below and before and behind us
stretched this mighty wall of flame,
103
a
gigantic shell of fire that enclosed within itself the vast space in which our
cruiser raced, a space large enough to hold within it a dozen solar systems
like my own. Stunned, we gazed out into that mighty flame-bounded space, and
then I flung out a hand toward it in sudden comprehension.
"We're
inside the nebula!" I cried. "It's hollow! This vast open space lies
at its heart, and those currents carried us down into it!"
For I saw now that this was the explanation. Unsuspected by any in the Galaxy the mighty
nebula was hollow, its gigantic globe of flaming gas holding at its heart this
mighty empty space, a space mighty in extent to our eyes, but small compared to
the thickness of the great shell of fire that enclosed it. And down through
that fire, that vast ocean of flame, the currents of the nebula had brought us,
from its outer surface, down into this great space at its heart of which none
had ever dreamed, and into which we had been the first in all
the Galaxy to penetrate.
While
we gazed across it, stunned, our cruiser was racing on into this vast hollow,
away from the wall of flame behind us from which we had just emerged. And now,
as we flashed on, Sar Than cried out too and pointed
ahead. There,, standing out black against the encircling walls of fire in the'
distance, was a small round spot, a spot that was growing to a black globe as
we hurtled on toward it, a globe that hung motionless at the center of this
mighty space, here at the nebula's heart. We were racing straight into the
great cavity toward it and now there came a low exclamation from Jor Dahat,
beside me, as his eyes took in the great globe ahead.
"A planet!" he whispered. "A planet here—within the nebula!"
My own eyes were fixed upon it, and slowly I
nodded, but made no other answer as we flashed on toward the object of our
attention, the black sphere ahead. And now as we swept on we saw that it was a
sphere of truly titanic dimensions, larger by far than any of the Galaxy's
countless worlds, and that as it hung there, at the nebula's heart, it was slowly
revolving, spinning, as fast or faster than the nebula
itself. Black and mighty it hung there, while all around it, millions of miles
from it, there flamed the nebula's encircling
104
fires. On
and on we raced toward it, and for all those minutes of flashing flight none of
us spoke, and there was no sound in the pilot room but the throbbing drone of
the generators below. I think that we all felt instinctively that in
the grim, colossal globe ahead lay the answer to what
we had come to solve, and as we hurtled on toward it we watched it broadening
before us in tense silence.
Larger
and larger it was becoming, larger until its great black circle filled half the
heavens before us. By then I had decreased our speed to a fraction of its
former figure, and as we swept in toward the giant world I lessened it still further. Slowly, ever more
slowly we moved, and now were circling above the great black planet, were beginning
to drop cautiously down toward it. Eagerly we watched as the mighty world's
surface changed from convex to concave, and as we dropped on we saw the needle
of our atmosphere-pressure dial moving steadily forward, to show that this
strange world had air, at least. Then all else was forgotten as our eyes took
in the scene below.
I think that we had all half expected to see
some evidence of life and civilization on this strange world, some building or
group of buildings, at least. But there was none such. Beneath us lay only a
smooth black plain, extending from horizon to horizon, devoid of hill or stream
or valley, in so far as we could see, unnaturally smooth and level. And as we
dropped nearer, ever nearer, the surprize we felt rapidly intensified, until
when at last we hung motionless a hundred feet above the surface of this world
exclamations of utter astonishment broke from us. For seen thus near, the
surface of this mighty planet was as utterly smooth and level as it had seemed
from high above, a black, gleaming plain without an inch-high elevation or
depression, an inconceivably strange smooth expanse of black metal, that stretched evenly away in every direction to the horizon, smoothly
covering this colossal world.
We looked at each other, a little helplessly,
then down again toward the smooth and gleaming surface below. In that surface
was no visible opening, no sign of joint or crack, even, nothing but the smooth
blank metal. Then with sudden resolution I thrust
forward the levers in my hands, sent our cruiser racing low across the surface
of the giant, metal-
105
sheathed
planet, while we gazed intently across that surface in search of any sign that
might explain the enigma of its existence. On we sped, while beneath us flashed
back the smooth metal plain, mile after endless mile. Then, gazing ahead, my
eyes suddenly narrowed and I raised a pointing hand. For there, far ahead, I
had glimpsed an opening in the gleaming surface, a round black opening that was
resolving itself into a vast circular pit as our cruiser raced on toward it.
Nearer
and nearer we flashed toward it, with Sar Than and Jor
Dahat beside me gazing forward, their interest as tense as my own. And now we
saw that the pit was of gigantic size, its circular mouth all of five miles in
diameter, and that from its center there drove up toward the zenith a
flickering beam of pale and ghostlike white light, so pale as hardly to be
visible, a livid white ray that stabbed straight up toward the fires of the nebula
far above. We were very near to the pale beam, now, flashing above the huge pit
straight toward it. I had a glimpse of the great pit's perpendicular black
metal walls, dropping down for miles into depths inconceivable, of something in
those dusky depths that burned like a great white star of light, and then Jor
Dahat suddenly uttered a choking cry, flinging an arm out toward the livid ray
before us.
"That
ray!" he cried. "It's not light—it's force! The nebula
—stop the ship!"
At that cry my hand flew out to the levers,
but a moment too late. For before I could throw them back,
could slow or stay our progress, we had raced straight into the great pale
beam. The next moment there came a terrific crash, as though we had
collided with a solid wall; our ship rocked drunkenly in midair for a single
instant, and then was whirling crazily downward into the depths of the mighty
pit below us.
Ill
My only memory now of that mad plunge downward is of
the pilot room spinning about me, and of the whistling roar of winds outside
caused by the speed of our fall. The
106
shock of
our collision had apparently silenced our generators, and it was moments before
I could struggle up to the controls and make an effort to start them. I jerked
open the switches and there came a hum
of power from beneath; but the next moment with a jarring, grinding shock our
cruiser had met the great pit's floor, flinging us once more to the floor.
For a moment we lay motionless there, and in
that moment I became aware of sounds outside, soft rustling sounds that were
hardly audible, as of soft-footed creatures moving about. The second shock had
again silenced the vibration-mechanism, which I had started the moment before
our crash, but I had no doubt that it was only that last-minute action on my
part that had slowed our fall enough to save our ship and ourselves from
annihilation. Now, staggering to my feet, I reached for the switch of the pilot
room's little emergency door, sending it sliding back, admitting a rush of
warm, fresh air, and then with my two companions behind me stared dazedly
forth.
Our
battered cruiser was resting now on the great pit's floor, a vast circular
plain of smooth metal five miles in diameter, enclosed on all sides by vertical
cliffs of gleaming metal that loomed for miles above us. A dusky twilight
reigned here at the great shaft's bottom, but we saw now that that bottom was
covered with countless great machines, enigmatic, shining mechanisms that
covered the pit's floor completely except for a round clearing at its center,
at the edge of which our cruiser rested. From each of the massed machines
around us ran a slender tube-connection, and all of these tubes, thousands in
number, combined to form a thick black metal cable which led into a huge object
at the clearing's center. This was a giant squat cylinder of metal, its height
no more than fifty feet but its diameter a full thousand, into the side of
which the thick black cable led and whose upper surface shone with a vast brilliant white light that half dispelled the shadows here at the
vast pit's bottom. It was from this brilliant upper surface of the cylinder
that there sprang upward the great livid ray, a flickering beam of pale light that stabbed straight up toward the
glowing fires of the nebula far above.
It was not on the great cylinder or on the
massed ma-107 chines around us, though, that our eyes first rested, but on the
shapes, the creatures, who had gathered about our cruiser and stood before us.
They were creatures of surpassing strangeness and horror, even to ourselves,
unlike in form as we were. Each of them was simply a shapeless mass of plastic
white flesh, several feet in thickness, a formless thing of pale flesh without
limbs or features of any kind, the only distinguishing mark being a round black
spot on the body or mass of each. A dozen or more of them had gathered before
us, a dozen shapeless masses of flesh resting on the smooth metal floor there,
each with the black spot on his body turned up toward us like some strange eye,
which, we knew instinctively, it in reality was.
As
we watched them in horror, we saw one of them suddenly move toward us across
the smooth metal. A limbless mass of flesh, he glided across the level floor
as a snake might glide, the flesh of him flexing and twisting to bear him
smoothly forward. Just beneath us he stopped, and there was a moment of tense
silence while the whole scene impressed itself indelibly on my brain—the vast,
metal-walled pit, the great ghostly ray that clove up through its shadowy dusk
toward the nebula far above, the weird white masses of flesh before us. Then up
from the creature below us there shot a long, slender arm, an arm that formed
itself out of the flesh of his—body—like
the pseudopod of a jellyfish, reaching swiftly upward toward us.
That
sight was enough to break the spell of horror that had held us, and with a
strangled cry I fell back from the door, reached toward the
controls to send our ship slanting up out of this place of horror. But as I did so there came a shout from my two
companions, and I whirled around to see a half-dozen pseudopod arms reach in
through the open door, and then by that grip six or more of the weird creatures
had drawn themselves up into the pilot room, and were upon us.
I felt cold, boneless arms twine swiftly
around my neck and body, struck out in blind rage against the twisting masses
of flesh that held me, and then felt my arms gripped also, felt myself being carried toward the door. The next moment I had
been swung smoothly down to the metal floor below and released there, standing
panting with my
108
two
companions while our strange captors surveyed us. Several of them held in
pseudopod arms little square boxes of metal which they held toward us, and one
of them, as if for an object lesson, turned his toward a little pile of metal
bars not far away, and touched a switch in its handle. Instantly a narrow
little jet of what resembled thick blue smoke sprang out of the thing toward
the pile of bars, and as it touched them I saw them instantly crumbling and
disintegrating like sugar in water, disappearing entirely in a moment. The
meaning of the action was plain enough, and with a half-dozen of the deadly
things trained full upon us we gave up all thoughts of a dash back to the
cruiser.
Now
the foremost of the creatures seemed to undergo a series of swift changes in
shape, his plastic body twisting and changing from one strange form to another
with inconceivable rapidity. After a moment of this protean changing his body
settled back into its former shapeless mass, but as it did so three of the
creatures behind him came forward toward us, as though in answer to a silent
command. I was later to learn what I half guessed at
the moment, that it was by these swift changes in bodily shape that the
creatures communicated with each other, each such change, however slight,
carrying to them as much meaning as a change of accent in spoken speech does to
us.
The
three that had come forward each held in a pseudopod arm one of the deadly
box-weapons, and now they placed themselves around us, one in front and the
other two behind us. Then they motioned eloquently toward the left, and after
a moment's hesitation we set off in that direction, around the clearing's edge.
Past the looming machines we went, my own eyes intent
on the huge cylinder in the clearing beside us, from which arose the great ray
of impenetrable force into which our ship had crashed. Through the twilight
that reigned about us I saw that only a handful of
these nebula-creatures were to be seen on all the pit's floor, and wondered
momentarily at the smallness of their numbers. Then my speculations were driven
from my mind as our guards suddenly halted us, several hundred feet around the
clearing's edge from our cruiser.
Before us there yawned a round, dark opening
in the smooth floor, a small, shaftlike pit some ten feet in diameter,
109
its
sides disappearing down into a dense darkness. As we stared, the guard before
us glided to the shaft's edge and suddenly swung himself over that edge,
disappearing from view. And as we stepped closer we saw that he was lowering
himself down the shaft's smooth metal wall by means of metal pegs inset every
few feet in that wall, dropping from peg to peg in smooth, effortless descent.
Now our two remaining guards raised their weapons significantly, motioning
toward the shaft. Choice of action there was none, so after a moment's
involuntary hesitation I stepped to the edge and grasped the highest peg,
swinging myself over the edge and down until I had found a foot-hold on a lower
peg, then shifting my grasp to swing down again in the same manner. After me came
Jor Dahat, and after him the plant-man Sar Than, who
swung easily down by grasping the pegs with all of his four limbs. Then the two
guards were swinging down after him, and we were dropping steadily down the
line of pegs into the rayless darkness.
I think now that of all the journeys in the
universe that journey of ours down the shaft was the strangest. Plant-man and
human and Arcturian, three different beings from three far-distant stars, we
swung down that dizzy ladder into the dark depths of this ' strange world at
the fiery nebula's heart, guarded above and below by formless beings of
weirdness unutterable. Down we clambered, feeling blindly in the darkness for
our hand and foot-holds, down until at last, far below, there appeared a faint
little spot of white light in the darkness.
The
spot of light grew stronger, larger, as we climbed down toward it, until
finally we saw that we were nearing the shaft's bottom, at which it gleamed. A
few minutes more and we had clambered down the last peg and stood at the bottom
of the shaft, a dark, circular well of metal pierced in one side by a doorway
through which came the dim white light. Then we were bunched together once more
between our guards, and were marched through the door into a long corridor
dimly lit by a few globes of lambent white light suspended from its ceiling. As
we marched along this long, metal-walled corridor I wondered how far beneath
the great pit's floor we were, estimating by the length of our
110
downward
climb that it must be thousands of feet at least. Then my thoughts shifted as there came from ahead a deep humming,
beating sound, and a gleam of stronger light.
Before us now lay the end of the corridor, a
square of brilliant white light toward which we were marching. We reached it,
were passing through it, and then we halted in our tracks in sheer, stunned
astonishment. For below us there stretched a vast open space, or cavern, of
gigantic dimensions, its floor and sides and ceiling of smooth black metal,
brilliantly illuminated by scores of the lambent globes of light. For thousands
of feet before and above us stretched the great space, and in it was a scene of
clamorous activity that was stunning after the darkness and silence through
which we had come.
Ranged on the mighty cavern's floor were long
rows of machines the purposes of which were beyond our speculation, incredibly
intricate masses of great arms and cogs and eccentric wheels all working
smoothly with a steady beat-beat-beat of power, and tended by countless numbers
of the formless nebula-creatures among them. Some seemed to be
ventilating-machines of a sort, with great tubes leading upward through the
cavern's ceiling; from others streams of white-hot metal gushed out into molds,
cooling instantly into wheels and squares and bars; still others appeared to be
connected with the great globes of light above; and some there were, like great
domed turtles of metal, that moved here and there about the cavern's floor,
reaching forth great pincer-arms to grip stacks of bars and plates and carry
them from place to place.
Only a moment we stared across that scene of
amazing activity before our guards were again
motioning us onward, across the cavern's floor. Between the aisles of looming
mechanisms we marched, whose formless attendants seemed not to heed us as we
passed them. Before and around us glided the great turtle-machines with their
burdens, the humming of their operation adding to the medley of sounds about
us, only the shapeless nebula-creatures being completely silent. And as we
marched on I saw in the great cavern's distant walls doors and corridors
leading away to other vast brilliant-lit caverns that I could but vaguely
glimpse, extending away in every direction a great, half-Ill
seen vista of mighty white-lit spaces reaching
away all about us, stupendous, incredible. And as we went on we saw other
narrow shafts in the floor like that down which we had come, saw swarms of the
nebula-creatures rising from and descending into those shafts by the pegs set
in their sides, moving ceaselessly up and down from whatever other vast spaces
might lie beneath us in this titanic, honeycombed world.
At
last we were across the great cavern, had entered the comparative silence of
another corridor, and progressed down this until our guards turned us through
a doorway in its right wall. We found ourselves in a great hall, or room,
smaller by far than any of the vast caverns that honeycombed this world, but
unlike them quite silent, and with no humming machines or busy attendants. The
great, long hall, perhaps five hundred feet in length, was quite empty except
for a low dais at its farther end, to-, ward which our guards conducted us,
gliding before and behind us.
As
we neared it we saw that on each side of the dais was ranged a double file of
guards, each armed with the deadly weapon we had seen demonstrated, while upon
the dais itself rested ten of the formless nebula-creatures. Of these ten,
nine were like all of the others that we had seen, ranged in a single line
across the dais. The tenth, however, who rested in a central position in front
of the nine, was like the others in form or formlessness alone, being at least
five times larger in size than any of the others we had seen, an enormous mass of
white flesh resting there on the dais and contemplating us with his strange eye
as we were marched down the hall toward him. I divined instantly, by his
strange size and prominent position, that he held some place of power above the
others of his race. For weird and alien as his appearance was, there yet
reached out from him toward us a strong impression of some strange majesty and
power embodied in this monstrous mass of flesh, some awe-inspiring dignity that
was truly regal, and that transcended all differences of mind or shape.
In a moment we had been halted before the
dais, and then one of our guards glided forward, the mass of flesh that was his
body twisting and changing with lightning-like
112
swiftness in
the strange communication of these creatures. I had no doubt that he was
explaining our capture, and when he glided back the great creature on the dais
contemplated us for a time in motionless silence. Then his own body writhed
suddenly in protean change, in silent speech, and instantly one of the nine
creatures behind him glided from the dais and through a small door in the wall
behind it, reappearing in a moment with a complicated little apparatus in his
grasp.
This was a small black box from which slender
cords led to two shining little plates of metal. One of the plates he placed
upon the body of the great nebula king, directly beneath the strange eyes,
where it seemed to adhere instantly. Then, after pausing a moment, he glided
toward Jor Dahat with the other plate. The plant-man shrank back at his
approach, but as the guards around us raised their weapons he subsided,
allowing the creature to place the plate upon his own body beneath the head,
where it also adhered. This done, the creature moved back to the little box and
touched a series of switches upon it.
Instantly
a slight whining sound rose from the box while a little globe on its surface
flashed into blinding blue light. The great nebula ruler on the dais did not
move, nor did Jor Dahat, though I saw his face grow blank, perplexed.
For minutes the little mechanism hummed, and then, at a swift writhing order
from the monster on the dais the thing was switched off. A moment the nebula
king seemed to pause, then gave another silent order, and this time the
creatures at the box snapped on another series of switches, the globe upon it
flashing into yellow light this time.
As it did so I saw Jor Dahat's eyes widening
and starting, his whole body reacting as from an electric shock. His whole
attitude, as the little apparatus hummed on, was that of one who listens to
incredible things, his face a sudden mask of horror. Then suddenly he uttered a
strangled cry, tore the metal plate from his body, and before any could guess
his intention or prevent him had hurled himself with a mad shout straight at
the nebula king!
The
moment that followed lives
in my memory as one of lightning action. The very unexpectedness of Jor Dahat's mad
attack was all that saved him, for before the massed guards about us could turn
their deadly weapons on the plant-man he was upon the dais and the great
creature there, whirling across the platform with him in wild conflict.
Instantly Sar Than and I had leaped up to his side, glimpsing in that moment a
half-dozen great pseudopod arms form suddenly out of the monster with whom the
plant-man battled, wrapping themselves around him with swift force. Then,
before we two could reach his side, we had been gripped ourselves by the guards
on either side of us.
A
moment we struggled madly in the remorseless grip of those powerful arms, then
desisted as we saw others of the guards grasp Jor Dahat and pull
him down from the dais beside us, wrenching him loose from his hold on his
opponent. Then we three faced our captors once more, panting and disheveled, while
from the dais the great nebula ruler again surveyed us. I looked for instant
death as a result of that wild attack upon him, but whether the creature
intended to reserve his revenge for later, or whether there was in that cool
and alien mind nothing so human as a desire for
revenge, he did not order our deaths at that moment. His body spun again in
silent speech, and as it ceased a half-dozen of the guards surrounded us and
marched us back down the great hall and into the dim-lit corridor outside.
Instead
of conducting us back down that corridor toward the giant
cavern through which we had come, though, they led us in the opposite
direction. A thousand feet or more we were marched, and then the corridor
widened, while on either side of us now we made out holes in its floor, round
shafts like that down which we had come from above. In the sides of these
shafts, though, were no peg ladders, and we saw that
the depth of each was only some twenty-five to thirty feet. While we wondered
at their purpose our guards suddenly halted us before one of them, and then, taking a
114
flexible
little metal ladder from a recess in the wall, lowered it into the metal wall
and motioned us to descend. Slowly we clambered down, and when the three of us
had reached the well's bottom the ladder was at once drawn up. Then came the
rustling sound of the guards above, gliding back down the corridor, except for
a single one apparently left to guard us, who moved ceaselessly back and forth
above.
Silently we gazed at each other, then about
our strange prison cell. Even in the dim half-light of the corridor we could
see that it was quite unescapable, its smooth perpendicular walls without
projection of any kind. Even the nebula-creatures themselves,
for whom these strange cells must have been designed, could not have escaped
them, so there was small enough chance of our doing so. Without speaking
we slumped to the floor of our well-prison, and for a time there was a dull
silence there, broken only by the rustling glide of the single guard above.
At last the stillness was broken by the voice
of Jor Dahat, who had been gazing moodily toward the wall. "Prisoners,
here," he said slowly. "The one place of all places from which there
is no escape."
I shook my head. "It seems the
end," I admitted, dully. "We can't escape from this place, and if we
could there's no time left to do anything, now."
The plant-man nodded, glancing at the
time-dial on his wrist. "But twelve hours more," he said,
"before the end-before the break-up of the nebula, the cosmic cataclysm
that will wreck our universe. And these things who are our captors, these
shapeless nebula-creatures, responsible for that break-up, that
cataclysm—"
We stared at him in amazement, and he was silent
for a moment, then speaking slowly on. "I know," he said darkly.
"There in the hall of the nebula king I learned—what we came to learn. You
saw them put those plates upon him and me, saw that apparatus? Well, it is in
reality a thought-transmission apparatus, one which can transfer those vibrations
of the brain which we call thought, those mind-pictures, from one mind to
another. When it was first turned on I felt my senses leaving me, my brain a
blank. I stood there, my knowledge, my memories, my ideas, being pumped out of
me like water from a well, into the brain of that mon-
115
strous
ruler there. He must have learned, in those few moments, all of my own
knowledge of the universe outside the nebula, all of our own plans in coming to
this place. And then, at his order, the machine was reversed, and thoughts,
pictures, flowed through it from his brain to mine.
"It
must have been from a sheer desire to overawe and terrify me that the creature
sent his thoughts into my brain. I know that the moment it was turned on I
became conscious of ideas, thoughts, pictures, rushing into my mind, of new
knowledge springing whole into my brain. Much there was that was blank and
dark, ideas, no doubt, for which my own intelligence had no equivalent; but
enough came to me so that I realized at last who and what their part was in
whirling the nebula on to its breakup, and our doom.
"I
knew, with never a doubt, that this great open space at the nebula's heart had
been formed because the denser portions of its interior had contracted faster
than the outer portions. As you know, all nebulae contract with the passage of
time, their fiery gases condensing to form great blazing stars, the eon-old
cycle of stellar evolution, from fiery nebula to flaming sun. In this cycle
this great nebula followed, but because of its vast size the inner, denser
portions had contracted with much greater speed than the outer parts, forming
a great solid world, in time, while the outer parts were still but fiery gas.
This solid world spun at the center of the great space formerly occupied by the
gases that had contracted to form, it, and it was warmed and lit eternally by
the encircling fires of the nebula all around it, and shut off from the outside
universe by those fires.
"Light
and warmth had this world in plenty, therefore, and with time life had risen on
it, crude forms ascending through the channels of evolutionary change into a
myriad different species, of which one species, the nebula-creatures we have
seen, was the most intelligent. In time they ruled this strange world, wiping
out all other species, and climbed to greater and greater science and power
with the passage of time, their existence never suspected by any in the universe
outside. Back and forth through the Galaxy went the great star-cruisers of the
federated suns, but none ever
116
dreamed of
the strange race that had grown to power on this world at the fiery nebula's
heart.
"But
slowly, inexorably, destruction began to creep upon that race. As I have said,
all nebulae contract always, and this one was still doing so, still growing
smaller and smaller, its encircling fires closing
steadily in upon the spinning world at their heart. Hotter and hotter it became
on that world until life was hardly possible on it for the nebula-creatures,
accustomed as they were to a milder temperature. They must escape that heat or
perish, and since they could not escape to outer space through the prisoning
fires around them they did the last thing available, hollowed out vast caverns
in the interior of their world and descended into those caverns to live. The
whole surface of their world they sheated with a smooth, heat-reflecting metal, and then descended in all their hordes
into the countless mighty caverns that honeycombed all their
great world, taking up their life again in those cool depths, safe from the
nebula's heat.
"Ages passed over them while they lived
thus in their world's depths, but still the nebula contracted, closed in upon
them, in that vast, remorseless cycle that is nature's law throughout the
universe. Closer and closer crept its fires toward the
metal-sheathed world of the nebula people, until at last they saw that soon
those fires would envelop their world and annihilate it, unless they were
turned back in some way. So for a time they bent all their energies toward the
problem of turning back the nebula's contracting fires, and at last found a way
to do so, one which would take all their strength and science to carry out.
"In
the surface of their metal-covered world they sank a vast, metal-walled pit, and in that pit set massed machines capable of
generating an atomic ray of terrific power. From each of the
generating-machines led a connection carrying the power produced by it, all
these connections combining into the thick cable we saw which leads into the
great cylinder-apparatus, generating inside it the mighty ray that stabs up
toward the nebula, and into which we crashed. Now the great world here at the
nebula's heart is already spinning, revolving, and the purpose of the nebula
people was to use
117
the
great ray as a connection between their spinning world and the encircling
nebula, to set the nebula to spinning also by this means, the ray being equal
to a solid connection between the two. And their plan proved a sound one, for
after the great ray had been put into operation the vast encircling nebula
began to move slowly, to revolve, faster and faster as its turning accelerated under
the constant impetus of the great ray.
"When
the nebula should reach a certain speed of whirl, the nebula-creatures knew,
when it should reach the critical point of its spin, it would be whirling so
fast that it would not longer be able to hold its mighty mass together, and it
would break up, disintegrate, its fiery mass flying off through the Galaxy in
all directions. This would remove all danger from the nebula people, who could
then live on without fear in their cavern-honeycombed world, using artificial
light and heat. They knew, however, that once started the whirling of the
nebula must be kept up until it had reached its critical point and had broken
up, since if the whirling were slackened before then, the great ray turned off,
the vast, ponderously turning nebula would collapse with the removal of the
ray, its collapsing fires annihilating the nebula world inside it. For this
reason the great machines in the pit that generated the power for the ray were
made completely automatic and certain in operation, needing only a handful of
the nebula-creatures to attend them.
"It was that handful that captured us
when we came, our ship falling down to the great pit's floor after crashing
into the terrific ray. And after we had been brought down here, after I had
learned thus what terrible plan of these creatures it was that was bringing
doom to our own universe, I lost my senses, sprang at the nebula king,
unconscious of all but what I had just learned. And now you know what it was I learned, what we came here to learn. But we have learned too
late, now, for in less than twenty hours the nebula's whirling will have
reached its critical point, will have sent its vast flaming mass hurtling out
across our universe, our Galaxy, in all directions, to carry destruction and
death to all the peoples of our suns and worlds!"
The silence of our shaft-cell was suddenly
heavy and brooding as the voice of Jor Dahat ceased. From above came the soft
rustling of the guard there, gliding back and forth along the dim corridor, and
faintly to our ears from the distant vast caverns came the clash and hum of the
great machines there, with all their clamor of activity. At last, as though
from a distance, I heard my own voice break the
silence.
"Twelve
hours," I said slowly. "Twelve hours—before the end." Then I,
too, fell silent, and silently, hopelessly, we stared into each other's eyes.
Through
the hours that followed, the same deathly silence hung over us, a silence
intensified by the thing in all our thoughts, a silence deafening as the rumble
of doom. Always now that scene comes back to me in memory as a strange, dim-lit
picture—the dusky little well at the bottom of which we crouched, hardly able
to make out each others' faces, the ceaseless humming activity from the great
caverns beyond, the measured glide of our guard above. Hour passed into hour
and we moved not, changed not, sitting on in dull, despairing silence. At last,
weary as I was, I drifted off into restless sleep, tortured by vague dreams of
the horrors through which we had come.
When
I opened my eyes again it was to find Jor Dahat gently shaking me, crouched
there beside me. As he saw me wake he bent his head to my ear. "Sar Than has a plan," he whispered to me. "We've
hardly more than an hour left but he thinks that we have a chance that way to
get out—a million to one chance. If we could—"
But
by that time I was crawling over to the Arcturian's side, and eagerly we
listened while in whispers he outlined his project for escaping from our
pit-cell. Small enough chance there seemed that we could carry it out, and even
were we to escape from our well-prison there seemed nothing but death awaiting
us farther on, but we were of one mind that it would be better to meet our end
thus than wait in the shaft tamely for death. Therefore, crouching against the
wall, we waited tensely for the guard above to pass our shaft.
Pass
he did, in a moment more, his monstrous shapeless body
gliding to the shaft's edge and peering down there
119
at us
in passing, as usual. Then he was gone, gliding J on down the corridor, and
instantly we sprang to our feet. ! At once Jor Dahat stepped over to the wall,
standing with his back against it and his feet braced widely on the floor. Then
Sar Than climbed nimbly up over the plant-man's body until two of his four limbs
rested on the shoulders of Jor Dahat, who now grasped those two limbs in his
own hands and raised them as high as he could reach, holding the Arcturian
above him by the sheer force of his powerful muscles.
With
his other two limbs Sar Than also was reaching ,
upward and now I clambered up in turn, over the plant- . man
and the Arcturian, until the latter, grasping my own feet, had raised me in
turn as high as he could reach. Thus upheld I was just able to reach the
shaft's rim above with my upstretched hands, and there, in that precarious
position, we awaited the return of the guard.
It
could hardly have been more than a minute, at most, that we waited, but to
ourselves, balancing there with muscles strained to the utmost, it seemed an
eternity. I heard the rustling glide of the guard's approach, now, but at the
same time felt the Arcturian's hold giving, beneath me, heard the great muscles
of the plant-man cracking beneath the weight of both of us. I knew that my two
companions could hold out for but a moment longer, and then, just as the
Arcturian's grip on my feet began to slip, the returning guard had reached the
pit's edge, pausing there, directly above me, to peer down as usual. The next
moment I had reached up with a last effort and had gripped him, and then we
four were tumbling down into the well, pulling the guard down with us.
As we fell I had heard his weapon rattle on
the floor above, knocked from his grasp, but as we reached the well's floor he
had already gripped us with a half-dozen pseudopod-arms that formed themselves
lightning-like out of the shapeless mass of flesh that was his body. Then we
were plunging about the floor of the well in a mad, weird battle, as silent as
it was deadly.
The thing could not cry out for help, but for
the moment it seemed to us that alone it might conquer us, its suddenly formed
arms roiling swiftly about us, great tentacles of
120
muscle
that were like to have choked us in the first moment of combat. Strike and
grasp as we would there seemed no vulnerable spot on the creature's slippery
body, and weary as we were the outcome of the struggle was for a time extremely
doubtful. I heard Sar Than utter a strangled cry as a
thick arm noosed itself about his body, felt another striving for a hold on my
own head, and then saw Jor Dahat suddenly grasp two of die slippery arms and
literally tear the thing's shapeless body into half with those two holds. There
was a soft ripping sound and then the creature had slumped to the floor, a limp
mass of dead flesh.
A
moment we stared breathlessly at each other over the dead thing, then without
speaking sprang to the wall, where Jor Dahat braced himself to repeat our
former procedure. In a moment he had raised the Arcturian above him, and within
another moment Sar Than was raising me likewise until
I had again gained a grip on the rim of the shaft above. A fierce struggling
effort and I had pulled myself up to the floor of the dim-lit corridor, where I
lay panting for a moment, then leapt to my feet and over to the recess in the
wall from which I had seen the flexible ladder taken. A moment I pawed
frantically in the recess, then uttered a sob as my fingers encountered the
cold metal of the ladder. It was but the work of an instant to lower it into
the well for my two companions to climb up, and then we gazed tensely about us.
The long, dim-lit corridor was quite empty
for the moment, though away down its length we glimpsed the square of white
light that marked the point where it debouched into the great caverns. That was
our path, we knew; so down the corridor we ran, between the rows of those
shaft-cells on either side, until we were just passing between the last two of
those shafts and were reaching the point where the corridor narrowed once more.
And then we suddenly stopped short, stood motionless; for, not a hundred yards
ahead, a double file of the nebula guards had suddenly issued from a door in
the corridor's wall, and were gliding straight down its length toward us!
For a single moment death stared us in the face, and we
stood there stupefied with terror. As yet the guards approaching us seemed not
to have glimpsed us, owing to the corridor's dim light, but with every moment
they were drawing nearer and it was but a matter of seconds before we would be
seen and slain. Then, before we had recovered from our stupefaction, Sar Than had jerked us sidewise toward one of the last
shaft-cells in the floor that we had just passed.
"Down
here!" he cried, pointing into its dark depths. "Down here until they
pass!"
In a
flash we saw that his idea was indeed our last chance, and at once lowered
ourselves over the dark shaft's rim, hanging from its edge with hands gripped
on that edge.
We
had not been too soon; for a few seconds later there came the rustling sound of
the guards passing above, gliding down the corridor past our place of
concealment. As they glided by we hung in an agony of suspense, hoping against
hope that they would not glimpse our hands on the pit's rim, or notice the
absence of the creature left to guard us. There was a long, tense minute of
waiting, and then they were past. We hung for a few moments longer, with aching
muscles, then drew ourselves up to the corridor's floor once more and started
down its length toward the square of white brilliance in the distance.
Down the dim-lit corridor we ran, past open
doors in its walls through which we glimpsed great halls and branching
passageways, all seeming for the moment deserted. A few moments later we had
reached the corridor's end, and were peering out into the gigantic, white-lit
space that lay beyond, a space alive and clamorous with the same multifarious
activity as when we had come through it. To venture out into that great place
of humming machines and thronging nebula-creatures was to court instant death,
we knew, yet it must be crossed to gain the single shaft that led upward. Then,
while we still hesitated, I uttered a whispered exclamation and pointed to
something in the shadows beside us, something big and round that lay just
inside the broad corridor's dusk, and that gleamed faindy in the dim
122
light. In
a moment we were beside it, and found it to be one of the great turtle-machines
that swarmed across the floors of the vast caverns beyond us, though this one
was unoccupied, its round door open to expose the hollow interior of the dome.
"There's
our way out!" I cried. "There's room in it for the three
of us!"
Within
another moment we were inside it, crouching together in the cramped space of
the interior and swinging shut the little door. I found that a narrow slit
running around the dome allowed us to look forth, and that a little circle of
switches grouped around a single large lever were evidently its controls.
Swiftly I pressed these switches in a series of combinations, and then there
came a welcome hum of power from beneath and we were gliding smoothly out of
the shadowy corridor into the full glare of the thronging, white-lit cavern, my
hand on the central lever guiding our progress.
Tensely
we crouched in our humming vehicle as it moved smoothly across the cavern,
between the rows of great machines, toward the corridor opening in the
opposite wall. The thronging nebula-creatures about us paid us no attention
whatever, taking us for but one of the scores of turtle-machines that were busy
about us. Hearts beating high with our success we glided on toward the dark
wall-opening that was our goal. A score of feet from it we suddenly held our
breath as another of the turtle-machines collided suddenly with our own, but in
a moment it had glided away and in another moment we were again in the shadows
of a dim-lit corridor, gliding down its length toward the shaft that led
upward.
We reached the corridor's end, sprang out of
our machine and through the door into the well-like bottom of the shaft. At
once the plant-man was clambering up the peg-ladder, followed by the Arcturian
with myself last. Up, up we climbed, putting all our strength into the effort,
for we knew that not many minutes remained for action. Then suddenly as I
looked down I stopped and breathed an exclamation; for standing at the bottom
of the shaft were two of the nebula-creatures, not more than a hundred feet
below us— two white masses of flesh that were staring up toward us.
123
A moment we hung motionless on the pegs,
while the two weird beings gazed up, and then we saw one of them glide back
into the corridor, racing back to the great caverns to sound the alarm, we
knew. The other gazed up at us once more and then, to our horror, began to
climb swiftly up after us.
I think now that of all that befell us there in the nebula world the
moments that followed were the most agonizing. Swinging ourselves up by sheer
muscular power, from peg to peg, we clambered up that giddy ladder, through a darkness impossible of description. Somewhere in that darkness
below me, I knew, the nebula-creature that pursued us was swinging up after me,
and I knew that to such a creature the negotiation of this dizzy ladder was
child's play. Yet, spurred on by deadly fear, I struggled upward with
superhuman speed, a hundred feet, another hundred, until a hope flashed across
my brain that the thing that pursued us might have given up that pursuit. Then
above us I glimpsed a little dot of glowing light, knew it for the shaft's
mouth far above. And at the same moment that I glimpsed it, I felt a tug on my ankles, a powerful arm fasten round my body, and knew
that the pursuing creature had reached me.
I cried out involuntarily as I felt my feet
twitched off the pegs on which they had rested, and dangled for a moment there
by my hands while the creature below me tightened his grip on my feet and began
to pull me steadily downward. All his force he must have put into that effort,
and I felt my hands slipping on the peg which they held, knew that once I lost
my hand-grip the creature below would release my feet also and send me
hurtling down to death on the shaft's floor far below. In a deathly silence I hung
there, striving against that deadly pull, and then felt one of my hands torn
from its grip, felt the fingers of the other slipping on the peg they held,
felt my will relaxing-Then someone had suddenly swung down past me from above,
and I glanced down to glimpse in the dim light from above Sar Than, swinging
swiftly down past me and hanging by one of his powerful limbs while with the
other three he grasped the creature below me. Instantly the latter's grip
124
on my feet relaxed, there was an instant of
swift scuffling below me, and then I glimpsed
the shapeless body of the nebula-creature forced from its hold on the pegs,
hurtling down into the darkness to strike the floor far below with a smacking thud. The next instant Sar Than was up
to me and was pulling me up until I again clung safely to the pegs. Only the
Arcturian, with his four strange limbs, could ever have successfully battled
the nebula-creature thus on that
giddy ladder of pegs.
But
now we were again clambering up, calling on all our strength to bear us on,
watching the little circle of dim light above broadening as we climbed up
toward it. Below us, we knew, the alarm had been given, and within a few
minutes now a horde of the nebula-creatures would be
rushing up the shaft. And but minutes were left for us to act in, so that we
put every effort into a mad burst of speed that within a few more minutes had brought us up to the shaft's mouth.
Jor Dahat, above us, was the first to reach
its level, and I saw the plant-man raise his head and peer cautiously forth,
then beckon us upward. Silently, stealthily, we climbed up, crept over the
shaft's edge until we crouched on the smooth metal floor. The scene about us
was the same as before, the vast, metal-walled pit, the massed machines around
us, the great cylinder at the clearing's center from which arose
the livid ray, the long shape of our battered cruiser lying beyond it. A
half-dozen of the nebula-creatures were gathered near the great cylinder, and
we saw their bodies twisting in their silent speech, but their strange eyes
were not turned in our direction.
In a moment Jor Dahat crept silently to one
side, where lay a mass of tools, and came back with
three heavy, axlike implements of metal in his grasp, long-handled and
broad-bladed. Silendy he handed one of these to each of us, and then without
words we crawled silently toward the gathered nebula-creatures, on hands and
knees. Inch by inch, foot by foot, we crept toward them. I looked up, once, saw the glowing fires of the nebula far above us, knew
that within minutes those fires would be flying out through our universe in
flaming destruction unless we could act. My
125
grip
tightened on my weapon as we crawled on through the shadowy dusk, and then
suddenly one of the creatures before us had turned and was gazing straight
toward us.
Before
he could turn to his companions in warning, before j he could do more than
merely glimpse us, we had sprung to our feet and were leaping toward the
creatures with up- j raised axes. The next moment we were upon them, our heavy
J weapons flashing right and left in swift destruction, and when we lowered
them only masses of dead flesh lay at our feet. Wildly we looked about, but
there seemed no other of the nebula-creatures on all the
great pit's floor, nothing j but
the silent, automatic machines, and the great cylinder of the ray. Now we leapt
toward that cylinder, then halted. A j half-dozen
pseudopod arms were reaching up from the shaft up which we had come, a
half-dozen of the creatures pulling themselves up there. It was the pursuit
from beneath!
Jor
Dahat cried out, raced toward the shaft's mouth with the Arcturian. "Cut
the cable, Ker Kal!" he shouted. "The cable that runs into the
cylinder—Sar Than and I will hold them in the shaft!"
I
saw the two of them reach the shaft's mouth just as a mass of the nebula-creatures were emerging from it, saw 1 their
two great axes flash down and send the shapeless beings hurtling down to death.
Then I had leapt myself to ' the great, foot-thick cable of black metal that
ran into the cylinder's side, carrying into it the power from all the machines
about us which generated the mighty ray. I raised my ax, brought it down with
all my force on the cable, but on the hard metal it made only a shallow cut.
Again I swung it, and again, with all my force, while at the shaft's mouth I
glimpsed the axes of my two friends flashing in the dim light like brands of
lightning, falling in swift death upon the shapeless nebula-creatures as they
sought to emerge from the shaft. I heard the puff of jets of the deadly blue
smoke leaping upward, but knew that so long as they were held inside the shaft
they could not reach the Arcturian and the plant-man with their annihilating
jets.
Fiercely I swung my own ax down upon the
black metal of the thick cable, in one swift blow after another, severing its
twisted strands one after the other. The last minutes
126
were
speeding, I knew, and like some soulless automaton I wielded the great ax in
blow after blow, scarcely conscious in that mad moment of anything but the
thick length of metal below me. I was half through it, now, had cut through
half its strands, and knew that another dozen of blows would sever it. And even
as hope flamed up in my brain there was a cry from Jor Dahat, I saw a sudden
resistless wave of the nebula-creatures pour up from the shaft and force my two
companions back toward me, and then they were raising their deadly weapons to
send annihilation upon us.
For
a single moment the whole scene seemed as motionless as a set tableau. Then
with a wild shout I whirled the great ax high above my head, swung it for an
instant in a flashing circle, and then brought it down with the last mad
remnant of my force upon the half-severed cable below, a powerful blow that
clove through its twisted strands as a knife might cut through cords. There was
a flash of light as the cable parted, and then the brilliance of the great
cylinder's upper surface had snapped out, and the mighty ray that sprang from
it had vanished I
The next instant there was utter silence, a
thick, terrific silence in which we, and all the nebula-creatures that had
crowded up onto the pit's floor, gazed up toward the mighty nebula's fires, far
above us. Seconds, minutes, that awful silence reigned, and then I saw the
weapons of the nebular-creatures before us dropping from their grasp, saw them
rushing wildly about as though in mad, frenzied terror, heard a great cry from
Jor Dahat, beside me.
"The
nebula!" he cried hoarsely, pointing up toward the glowing fires above. "The nebula—collapsing!"
I
looked up, dazedly, saw the vast fires moving now, slowly, majestically,
gigantically, moving down toward us, toward the nebular world, the whole vast
turning nebula collapsing into the great space at its center with the removal
of the ray that had whirled it on, its mighty, crowding fires rushing down upon
us. Then I had sunk to the floor, felt the arms of my two friends about me,
dimly felt myself dragged across the floor through the crazily rushing hordes
of nebula-creatures into our cruiser, felt it lifting up out of the great
127
pit
with the plant-man at the controls, as the fires above • rushed down upon us.
Then
there was a thunderous roaring of titanic fires about us, a vast, interminable
rushing of colossal currents of flaming gas all around us as we plunged upward
through the collapsing nebula. More and more dimly to my ears came that mighty
roar of flame as consciousness began to leave me, but at last, through my
darkening senses, I felt that it had ceased, that we were humming through space
once more. With a last effort I staggered to the window with my two companions,
gazed down dazedly toward the terrific ocean of boiling flame that stretched
gigantically beneath us, saw that still its fires were drawing together,
collapsing, contracting, condensing. Then suddenly up from the collapsing
nebula there leapt a single mighty tongue of fire, as from , some titanic
conflagration, a vast rush of flame that towered up toward the stars, and dien
dwindled and sank and died.
It was the end forever of
the world within the nebula.
VI
It was more than two weeks later that with all the
thousands of the great Council of Suns we passed out of the mighty tower into
the starlit night. They were still shouting, those thousands, for it was but
hours before that our battered cruiser had swung down toward the tower out of
the void of space, to meet such a reception as never yet had been equaled in
this universe. And now that the Council's tumultuous meeting had closed at
last, and each of its members made ready to depart for his own sun, the
shouting applause about us was redoubled.
At last from out of the darkness a great
star-cruiser swept toward us, paused, and then the member from Antares had
entered it and it was speeding up into the darkness. Another drew up before us,
entered by the strange representative from Rigel, and then it too had vanished
and still others were sweeping toward us. Out of the darkness they came,
star-cruiser after star-cruiser, and into each went
one of the members, flashing out to his own star once more. One by one, we
watched them go, watched the great ships lift
128
into the
darkness, starting out to Polaris and Fomalhaut and Algol, starting out on long
journeys to suns far out at the Galaxy's edge. One by one they went, until at
last there remained only we three of all the members, with the three cruisers
waiting before us that would carry us back to our own stars.
We
paused, then, with a common impulse gazing upward. Across the heavens gleamed
the hosts of suns, points of brilliant light in a field of deepest black. Moments we gazed up toward them, and toward three among
them that were far distant from each other across the heavens—the magnificent
golden splendor of great Capella, to the left, the fiery red brilliance of
Arcturus, to the right and above us and between them a* smaller star of deep
yellow, that little spark of light toward which the eyes and hearts of men
shall turn until the end of time, though they roam the limits of the universe.
A moment we gazed up, up toward the three orbs, and then Jor Dahat raised his
hand, pointing to another star low above the horizon, a great soft-glowing one
that was like a little ball of misty light.
"Look," he said
softly. "The nebula!"
Silendy we gazed out toward it for a long
moment, a moment in which our thoughts leapt out across the gulf toward the
glowing thing at which we gazed, toward that mighty realm of fire where we had
struggled for our universe, in the strange world inside it which we three had
plunged to its doom. Then, silent still, we gripped hands, and turned toward
our waiting cruisers.
Then they, too, were driving up into the
darkness, out from Canopus once more into the gulf of space, into the eternal
silence of the changeless void, each toward its star.
THE
COMET DRIVERS I
"Passing
Rigel on our left,
sir," reported the Canopan pilot standing in the control room beside me.
I
nodded. "We'll sight the Patrol's cruisers soon, then," I 129 told him. "I ordered them to mass beyond Rigel, just outside
the galaxy's edge."
Together
we strained our eyes into the impenetrable blackness of space that lay before
us. To the left, in that blackness, there burned the great white sun of Rigel,
like a brilliant ball of diamond fire, while to our right and behind us there
flamed at a greater distance red Betelgeuse, and blue-white Vega, and Castor's
twin golden suns, all the galaxy's gathered suns stretching in a great mass
there at our backs. Even then, though, our cruiser was flashing out over the
edge of the galaxy's great disk-like swarm of stars, and as white Rigel dropped
behind us to the left there lay before us only the vast, uncharted deeps of
outer space.
Gazing
forward into those black depths our eyes could make out, faint and
inconceivably far, the few little patches of misty light that we knew were
remote galaxies of suns like the one behind us, unthinkably distant universes
like our own. In the blackness before us, too, there shone a single great point
of crimson light, burning through the blackness of the outer void like a great
red eye. It was toward this crimson point that I and the great-headed, bodiless
Cano-pan pilot beside me were grazing, somberly and silently, as our cruiser
hummed on. Then as he shifted his gaze there came from him a low exclamation,
and I turned to see that a great swarm of gleaming points had appeared in the
blackness close before us, resolving as we flashed on toward them into a
far-flung, motionless swarm of long, gleaming cruisers like our own.
Swiftly our cruiser rushed into that hanging
swarm of ships, which made way quickly before us as there flashed from our bows
the signal that marked my cruiser as that of the Chief of the Interstellar
Patrol. Then as we too slowed and hung motionless at the head of the swarm I
saw three cruisers among them flashing toward us, slanting up and hovering just
beneath our craft. There came the sharp rattle of metal as their space-gangways
rose up and connected with our cruiser, and then the clang of our space-doors
opening. A moment more and the door of the control room was
snapped suddenly aside and three strange and dissimilar figures stepped inside,
coming swiftly to attention and saluting me.
"Gor Han! Jurt Tul! Najus Nar!" I
greeted them. "You've massed a thousand of the Patrol's cruisers here as I
ordered ?°
Gor
Han bowed in the affirmative. A great Betelgeusan, his big fur-covered shape
was typical of the races of that big sun's cold world: a huge barrel-like torso
supported by four thick stocky limbs, with four similar upper arms; his dark
eyes and other features being set directly into the upper part of that furry
torso, which was headless. Jurt Tul, beside him, was as strange a figure, patently of the amphibious peoples of Aldebaran's watery worlds,
his great green bulk of shapeless body and powerful flipper-limbs almost hiding
the bulbous head with its round- and lidless eyes. And Najus Nar, who completed
the strange trio, was as dissimilar from them as from myself.
One of the powerful insect-men of Procyon, his flat, upright body, as tall
almost as my own, was dark and hard and shiny in back and of soft white flesh
in front, with a half-dozen pairs of short limbs branching from it from bottom
to top, and with a blank, faceless head from the sides of which projected the
short, flexible stalks that held in their ends his four keen eyes. Strange
enough were these three Sub-Chiefs of the great Patrol, yet to me these three
lieutenants of mine were so familiar, in appearance, that as they faced me now
their strange and dissimilar forms made no impression on my mind.
"Your
order was urgent, sir," Gor Han was saying, "that we mass a thousand of the Patrol's cruisers here outside the galaxy's edge, and
await your coming."
"Urgent,
yes," I repeated somberly, my eyes turning from them to the great point of
crimson light that shone in the black depths beyond; "urgent because it is
out from the galaxy's edge that we are going with these cruisers, toward that
point of red light there in the void that has puzzled all the galaxy since its
appearance days ago—out toward that point of crimson light which our
astronomers now have discovered to be a gigantic comet that is racing at speed
incredible straight toward our galaxy from the depths of outer space!"
The three gazed at me, stunned, silent, and
in that moment the only sound- in the control room was the low humming of the
generators beneath, which sustained our ship
131
in
space. Then, gazing out again into the black depths ahead toward that blood-like
point, I was speaking on.
"Comets
there are in our galaxy, as you know, comets that revolve in irregular orbits
about various of our stars, and which have been
familiar to us always. A comet, as you know, consists of the coma or head, the
nucleus, and the tail. The coma is simply a great globe of electrical energy,
with a hollow space at its center. The nucleus is all the
comet's solid matter, a mass of meteoric and other material hanging in the
hollow at the coma's center. The great coma blows from its own electrical
energy, and is driven through space by the release of some of that energy
backward, through the vast tail, which is simply released energy from the coma.
It is the great coma that makes a comet deadly to approach, since any matter
that enters its terrific sea of electrical energy is converted instantly into
electrical energy likewise, changed from matter-vibrations to electrical vibrations,
annihilated. Our interstellar navigators have for that reason avoided the
comets of our galaxy, while never has it been dreamed that a comet might exist
in empty space outside our galaxy.
"Now,
however, our astronomers have found that this crimson spot of light that has
appeared in the outer void and has puzzled us for days is in reality a giant
crimson comet of size and speed unthinkable, which is racing straight toward
our galaxy and will reach it within a few more weeks. And when it does reach it, it means the galaxy's doom! For this gigantic comet, greater by far than any of the galaxy's
greatest suns, will crash through the galaxy's swarm of stars like a meteor
through a swarm of fireflies, annihilating those in its path by absorbing them
and their worlds into the terrific electrical energy of its mighty coma;
disrupting all the finely balanced celestial mechanism of our universe and
sucking its whirling stars into its deadly self as it smashes on; engulfing our
suns and worlds in elecjrical annihilation, and then racing on into the void,
leaving behind it but the drifting fragments of our wrecked and riven
universe!
"Onward toward our universe this mighty
comet is thundering, and but one chance remains for us to turn it aside. The
center of this comet, of any cornet, is the nucleus at
132
the
heart of its coma, which is the only solid matter in it. If we could penetrate
through the coma to the great hollow inside it, could turn upon that nucleus
the powerful force-beams used by our Patrol cruisers to sweep up meteor-swarms,
we could possibly push it aside enough to change its course, to send it past our
galaxy's edge instead of through it. But that must be done soon! Our
astronomers have calculated that within twelve more days the comet will have
reached a point so near the galaxy that it will be too
late for anything ever to turn it aside. When the Council of Suns informed me
of this I flashed word immediately for you three Sub-Chiefs to mass swiftly a
thousand of the Patrol's cruisers here outside the galaxy's edge. And with
these thousand ships we are starting at once toward the cometl
"Behind
us the Patrol will be massing another five thousand cruisers to send out after
us, but these can hardly reach the comet before it is too late. It is on us,
and on our thousand cruisers, that the galaxy's fate now hangs. If we can reach
the great oncoming comet, can penetrate through its deadly coma to the solid
nucleus at its center, can deflect that nucleus with our force-beams before the
twelfth day ends, we will have turned the great comet aside, will have saved
the galaxy itself from death. If we can not, the galaxy perishes and we perish
with it. For we of the Interstellar Patrol, who have defended and guarded the
ways of that galaxy for thousands upon tens of thousands of years, go out to
the oncoming comet now not to return unless we can turn that comet aside and
save our universe from doom!"
Again
in the control room was silence when I had finished, a silence that seemed intensified, as the three strange Sub-Chiefs before
me held my eyes. Then, without speaking, they calmly saluted once more, eyes
alight. Impulsively I reached hands out toward them, grasped their own. Then
they had turned, were striding swiftly out of the control room and through the
closed space-gangways to their own three cruisers. As our space-doors clanged
shut once more, the gangways of those cruisers folded down upon them, and then
the diree craft had smoothly moved back to take up a position just behind my own.
I turned to the round opening of the
speech-instrument beside me, spoke a brief order into it, and in answer to
133
that
order the thousand cruisers behind us smoothly and quickly massed into
space-squadron formation, a long slender wedge with my own cruiser at the apex
and those of the three Sub-Chiefs just behind me. Another brief order and the
Canopan pilot beside me was opening the controls, our cruiser and the great
triangle of massed cruisers behind us moving smoothly forward toward the
crimson-gleaming point in the blackness ahead, our generators throbbing louder
and louder as we slipped forward at swiftly mounting speed. We were on our way
toward the great comet, and our struggle for the life of our universe had begunl
The voice of Gor Han came clearly from the
speech-instrument as I stepped into the control room, days later. "Comet
dead ahead, sir," he announced.
But
my own eyes were already on the scene ahead. "Yes," I told him,
"another hour will bring us to the coma's edge."
For before us now, bulking crimson and mighty
and monstrous in the heavens ahead, glowed the giant
comet toward which for the last nine days our thousand ships had been
flashing. On and on we had rushed toward it at unnumbered light-speeds, through
the vast ether-currents that raged here in space outside the galaxy, past
regions of strange and deadly force which we but glimpsed and which we gave a
wide berth, on into the endless outer void until our galaxy had shrunk to a
small swarm of blinking light-points in the darkness behind us. Almost, in
those days, we had forgotten the existence of that galaxy, so centered was our
attention upon the sinister crimson glory of the comet ahead. Through these
days it had largened swiftly to our eyes, from a light-point to a small red
disk, and then to a larger disk, and finally to the gigantic circle of
crimson-glowing light that loomed before us now, and toward which I and the
three Sub-Chiefs in the cruisers just behind my own now gazed.
Tremendous as it was, the great comet's light
was not dazzling to our eyes, being a deep crimson, a dusky, lurid red, and gazing foiward I could make out its general features.
The spherical coma was what lay fuU before us, a gigantic ball of
crimson-glowing electrical energy that I knew, as in all comets, was hollow,
holding in the space
134
inside it
the solid matter of the nucleus. Behind it, too, I could glimpse the vast
faint-glowing tail streaming outward behind the onrushing coma. The light of
that tail, I knew, was but faint electrical energy shot back from the terrific
coma and propelling that coma forward through space like a great rocket streaming fire behind it. The small comets of our own
galaxy, I knew, moved in fixed though irregular orbits about our stars, and
thus would often move about a star
or sun in the opposite direction to that in which their tail was pushing them,
simply because even the impetus of the tail could not make them leave their
fixed orbits. This giant comet of outer space, though, I knew, moved in no orbit
whatever through the empty immensities of the outer void, and so would always
race through space in a direction opposite to that of its tail, the energy of
the mighty coma shot forth in the tail like the powder of a great rocket, propelling
it irresistibly forward with terrific momentum and force.
The
glowing coma seemed countless millions of miles across, the still vaster tail
behind appearing to extend limit-lessly backward into the void. Gazing toward
it, with something of awe, I was silent for a time, then turned to the speech-instrument.
"We'll slant our ships up over the coma," I ordered, "and
reconnoiter it for an opening."
Our massed cruisers shot steeply upward at
the order, but as they did so the voice of Jurt Tul came doubtfully from the
opening before me. "You think we can find an opening through which we can
penetrate inside the coma?" he asked.
"We'll have to," I told him.
"We've only a few score hours left to get inside and bring our force-beams
to bear on the nucleus."
The Aldebaranian's voice came slowly in
answer. "That coma," he said; "it seems impossible that we can
ever get inside it—"
There was silence as I gazed ahead toward the
great comet, whose coma was now indeed a terrific spectacle. An immense lurid
sea of crimson light, it seemed to fill all the
universe, shifting slowly downward and beneath us as our thousand cruisers
hummed up at a steep slant over it. We were racing toward it
at a full million miles above its level, the rim of the huge sphere of crimson
light creeping across
135
the
black void beneath us as comet and cruisers rushed closer to each other. Gazing
down toward the great coma, its lurid crimson light drenching all in the
control room, I heard startled exclamations beneath as even
the imperturbable members of my cruiser's cosmopolitan crew were awed by the
comet's magnitude and terror. Then, when the titanic crimson sphere of the coma
seemed squarely beneath our rushing ships, I uttered a word into the instrument before me,
and immediately our cruiser and the thousand behind it had halted, had turned
squarely about, and then at reduced speed were racing along at the same speed
as the comet, hanging above it and accompanying it on its mad rush through the
void toward our galaxy.
Below
us now lay the giant red-glowing globe of the coma, racing on toward the far
swarm of light-points that was our galaxy. And now, gazing intently down into
its far-flung glowing mass, I strained my eyes for sight of some opening,
some crevice in that mighty body of glowing electrical energy that would
permit us to penetrate to the space inside it. Yet no such opening could be
seen, no tiniest break in the coma's lurid sphere. A single, unbroken and
gigantic globe of crimson luminescence, it hung beneath us, as we rushed
through the void, the vast fan-tail of faintest crimson light streaming out
behind. Through all our days of tense flight outward toward the comet I had hoped against hope that in its coma would
be some break or opening, however small, that would permit us to penetrate
inside, but now my last hope, and the galaxy's last hope, was shattered by the
glowing, unbroken mass of this gigantic comet's coma. With sinking heart I gazed down toward it as our triangle of ships
sped on above it.
Gor Han's deep voice sounded from the
instrument before me. "There seems no opening in the coma at all, Khel
Ken," he said. "And it is instant annihilation for anything to venture
into that coma's electrical energy!"
"We'll have to drop lower and cruise
about the coma's surface," I told the Betelgeusan. "We must get inside.
With
the words our cruiser began to sink smoothly downward, still holding its
forward flight above the comet, the massed ships behind following steadily in
our course. Down —down—by thousands of miles a moment we sank, down
136
until the
giant coma beneath seemed the only thing in all the universe, glowing from
horizon to horizon like an awful aurora of crimson death. An inconceivably
colossal sea of lurid electrical energy, a giant deadly sphere of glowing force
which it were annihilation for anything to touch, it stretched beneath us,
broadening still as we came closer toward it. Down—down—
A
cry from Najus Nar sounded beside me. "Those cubes!" the insectman
was shouting. "Racing ahead of the comet there!"
Swiftly
I gazed down toward the foremost rim of the great, onrushing coma, and saw what
he had seen. Racing along a few thousand miles in front of the comet, separated
from each other by spaces, there sped score upon score of mighty metal cubes,
glinting in the coma's lurid light! Distant as they were, I could glimpse them
clearly through our telescopic windows, extending in a great chain or line
around the comet's head, and rushing before it through the deeps of space. And
there were openings in the sides of these speeding cubes, transparent openings
from which gushed pure white light! For they were
ships! Colossal cube-ships flashing on with the great comet on its thundering
rush toward our universe!
"Cube-ships!" It was Gor Han's shout that echoed my
thought.
"Cube-ships!" Najus Nar too was crying. "Scouting
before the comet!"
"And that means that these cubeships are
from the comet's heart!" I cried excitedly; "from its—"
My exclamation had been cut short by
simultaneous sharp cries from Gor Han and Jurt Tul.
"The
cubes have seen us!" they shouted. "They're coming up toward
us!"
For there, far below us, the great chain of
mighty cube-ships had suddenly condensed, shortened, and they had all, a hundred or more in number, massed swiftly together as though in answer
to some sudden alarm and were driving up toward us! At velocity incredible they
shot up toward us, while we gazed stunned; then as they flashed nearer there
flashed up from the foremost of them a long, slender shaft of crimson light
like that of the comet below, a terrific
137
bolt of
electrical energy like that of the coma beneath, which struck one of our
cruisers squarely and instantly annihilated it. And as we gazed stupefied
toward it in that dazing moment, from the upleaping cubes beneath score upon
score of other crimson deadly bolts were stabbing up toward us I
II
"Battle formation!"
Even
as the deadly crimson bolts had shot up from the cubes toward us I had yelled
the order into the instrument before me, and it was all that saved us from
disaster in that moment, since in the split-second before the glowing bolts
could reach us our cruisers had shifted their formation suddenly, only a score
of them being struck by those glowing shafts. In that moment our cruisers had
shifted into three long parallel lines, and then, as the massed cubes beneath
flashed ever upward toward us, their glowing bolts blasting our cruisers, I had
shouted another order into the speech-instrument above the great din beneath.
"The force-beams!" I cried. "Turn them on these
cube-ships—push them down into the coma!"
There
came a deep shout from Gor Han at the order, and from Jurt Tul's ship there
issued through my instrument the amphibian's cool laugh. The next instant there
were shooting downward from all our cruisers the great force-beams, broad
beams, not of light but of darkness, of utter blackness and absence of light,
of great force that was invisible itself but whose terrific power drove even
the light-vibrations .from its path and so made the force-beams seem beams of
utter blackness. Down toward the uprushing cube-ships the black force-beams
stabbed, and as they smote among those cubes those that were struck by them were driven suddenly downward with inconceivable power.
Down, down, struggling vainly against the irresistible force-beams that pushed
them, down, down until in a moment more those struck had been driven into the
crimson sphere of the mighty coma beneath, vanishing in its immense lurid sea and
there meeting annihilation instantly in spurts of leaping light!
Thus a full score of the
hundred cube-ships below had 138
been
forced down to death in the comet in a single moment, but the rest were still
leaping toward us and before we could loose more of the deadly force-beams they
were just beneath us, among us, their crimson bolts blasting lightninglike
about them, leaping from cube to cruiser. High above the titanic thundering
comet, like flies above a sun, cubes and cruisers whirled and struck and ran,
with crimson bolts and black force-beams stabbing thick through the void about
us. I heard the shouts of Gor Han and Jurt Tul and Najus Nar from the
instrument before me, screamed my orders into its opening as my own cruiser
soared through the wild mêlée with black beams whirling. I glimpsed one of
the cubes rocketing toward us, looming in an instant to immense size, a
colossal metal cube thousands of feet square, through the transparent sections
of which I could glimpse for a split-second the white-lit interior, a mass of
intricate mechanisms among which clung the beings who manned it, black,
shapeless masses that I but half glimpsed in that mad moment. Then from the
cube's great side a glowing red bolt shot toward us, but a moment too late,
since by then our cruiser had shot upward and our black forcebeam had smote
down upon the cubeship to drive it into the glowing sea of death below!
About us, too, all our cruisers were speeding
upward, in answer to my orders, and before the cubes could check our maneuver
we were over them, all our dark force-beams smiting from above. Struck by those
beams, all but a scant half-dozen of the remaining cubes drove down to doom in
the coma's fiery sea, before they could rise to our level to resume the battle.
The half-dozen left seemed to hover motionless a moment, then turned and sped
away from us, back over the coma's crimson-glowing sphere toward the great tail
of the comet, streaming out behind!
"We've
beaten them!" Gor Han was bellowing. "They're trying to get away—"
"After them!" I yelled into the speech-instrument.
"They're trying to get back inside the coma—they must have some way of
getting inside!"
But my order had been unnecessary, for even
as the half-dozen great cubes flashed away, our cruisers, still some eight
hundred in number, had turned and were racing
139
after
them like unleashed hounds after their prey. Downward and backward we raced
after them, low across the glowing surface of the great comet, over the deadly
coma to where the faint, vast tail issued from it. Ahead we could see the six
cubes fleeing onward, at a speed equal to our own, and the sight of them caused
us to open to the last notch the power of our throbbing generators for that
wild pursuit. Within moments, at that tremendous speed, there came into view
ahead the rear rim of the coma's colossal glowing sphere, with the fainter glow
that marked the currents of the great tail streaming back from the rim into the
void of space.
Swift
as were the great cubes ahead, though, our great cruisers of the Interstellar
Patrol, speediest of all the galaxy's ships, were proving now to be swifter,
since slowly, steadily, we had begun to overhaul those fleeing shapes. I heard
Gor Han's deep voice, excited as always in battle, from the speech-instruments,
heard Jurt Tul's calm comments as we drove nearer the flying cubes, heard Najus
Nar's eager cries. The cubes were passing out now from over the great coma, on
over the vast tail, to my puzzlement. I had thought they were striving to gain
the interior of the comet, but instead they were racing away from it, while
with every moment we were drawing nearer to them. Then, just when it seemed
that another moment's flight would bring us upon them, they halted abruptly in
space, hovering above the faint, vast-streaming tail, and then plunged straight
down into the mighty currents of the tail, and were moving back, inside that tail, toward the great coma behind us!
"The
tail!" cried Najus Nar. "They're going up the tail itself and into the
coma's heart!"
But I too had seen and had understood all in
that moment, had understood what I had not dreamed before, that the only
opening through the great coma to the hollow at its heart lay at the coma's
rear, and could be reached only by struggling up to it through the awful
currents of the tail! These mighty cubes, I saw, had been constructed in that
shape especially to resist and endure those terrible, back-sweeping
ether-currents set up by the comet's rush through the void, terrific currents glowing
with the electrical energy shot backward and dissipated in driving the
140
comet on.
The cubes thus specially constructed could brave those colossal currents where
weaker craft would be battered to fragments. All this I understood and weighed,
in that tense moment, and then had made decision and was shouting back into the
instrument before me.
"Down with our ships, too, then!" I cried. "We're going up the tail after them!"
I heard an exclamation from Gor Han, an
answering shout from Najus Nar, and then my cruiser and all the cruisers behind
us were dipping steeply downward, plunging into the vast and faint-glowing
tail! The next moment was one of blind, utter confusion, for as we plunged into
the terrific currents our cruisers were whirled up and backward as though by
gigantic hands, thrown helplessly like leaves in a terrific wind, cruiser
smashing against cruiser and destroying each other there by dozens in that wild
moment. Then as the pilot beside me clung to the controls, bringing its bows
around to face those mighty currents, heading toward the coma, our ship
steadied, while those about it steadied likewise. We had lost half a hundred
ships in that first terrific plunge, but neither my own nor those of the three
Sub-Chiefs had been injured, and now we were moving slowly up the great
currents of the tail toward the coma. The tail about us was to the eyes but a
great region of faint light, but far ahead of us there glowed like a crimson
wall of light across the heavens the mighty coma, and against it we could make
out the dark square shapes of the cube-ships we pursued, likewise fighting
their way toward the coma through those terrific currents.
I think now that the moments which followed,
as we struggled in pursuit of those cubes, were almost the most terrible I ever
experienced, moments in which it seemed impossible that our ships could breast
such awful currents and live. About us the currents roared deafeningiy,
thrilling through every portion of our ships, sweeping against us with titanic
power. On and on we struggled, veering to take advantage of weaker currents,
blundering into great maelstroms, swaying, plunging, fighting
on, with the coma's glowing wall looming ever closer ahead. I heard Gor Han's
anxious comments from the instrument before me, glimpsed
141
cruisers
here and there behind my own collapsing and sweeping backward, knew that not
for long could we fight against those currents and live.
The
coma was very near, now, a giant wall of crimson light across the heavens, and
now I made out a dark circle within that glowing wall, a circular opening
rapidly largen-ing to our eyes and toward which the flying cubes ahead were
struggling.
"The opening!" Gor Han was shouting, his voice coming to me even above the awful din
of the currents about us.
"Straight toward it after those cubes!" I cried. "Our ships can't stand this much
longer!"
Now
ahead I could see the cubeships we pursued struggl-ing toward that opening
slower and slower, fighting the currents which were most powerful here where
they issued from the mighty coma ahead. A moment more, though, and they had
reached it, and vanished inside, while we in turn were fighting through the titanic
sweep of those currents toward it. On—on—the currents that raged against us had
become awful in strength, seeming to clutch at us with supreme power at this
last moment. The opening loomed larger ahead, now, a
dark circular passageway remaining miraculously open and unchanged through
that electrical sea whose deadly crimson mass formed its walls. On—on—it seemed
that never could we reach it, so terribly did the currents sweep about us. Yard
by yard, foot by foot, we crept forward toward it, were on its brink, seemed to
hesitate there for an instant before being swept backward and away, and then
with a supreme last effort of our throbbing generators we crept forward out of
the grip of those gigantic currents and into the open passageway!
Now all about us there raged the glowing
electrical sea of the colossal coma, into the deadly mass of which the passage led, a straight passage which I knew could only be artificially made and
maintained. Far ahead in that light-walled passage we could glimpse the dark
shapes of the cubes, fleeing still before us, and now with humming generators
our cruisers leapt forward, through that tunnel of the deadly coma! Above,
below, on each side, there raged the coma's electrical sea, which it were
annihilation to touch, and the circular passage down which we fled was hardly
142
wide
enough to admit three of our ships abreast, yet down it at reckless speed we
sped, all thought leaving us now save the wild excitement of the pursuit.
Crimson
light from the hell of glowing death that raged all about us beat blood-like
upon us as we drove on, yet the cries of Gor Han and Najus Nar and even the
cool Jurt Tul mingled with my own from the speech-instrument, as we shot
forward in pursuit of the fleeing cubes. Never, surely, was pursuit stranger
than that one, the galaxy's hundreds of cruisers, manned by every dissimilar
shape to be found upon its myriad worlds, leaping forward in the narrow
opening that led through a comet's deadly mass into its unglimpsed heart, after
the strange cube-craft that fled on before us. A single slip of the controls
for a fraction of an inch was enough to send any cruiser into the incandescent
walls to death, and indeed I glimpsed cruisers among those that followed me
blundering into those walls in our wild flight onward and vanishing in wild
spurts of light!
Yet on and on we leapt, and shouted now as we
saw the cubes ahead shooting out from the passageway into open space beyond. A
moment more and we were on their tracks, were flashing out too from the encircling
crimson walls of glowing death, that vanished suddenly from about us as we
entered into a vast region of open space, the immense open space that lay at
the giant comet's heart! Far, far away from us there stretched the walls of the
gigantic coma that encompassed this open space, above and below, enclosing all
that space within their deadly electrical sea. This, though, we had expected
and it was not this that held our attention in that stunning moment. It was the
comet's nucleus, hanging at the center of that space. For that nucleus was a
mass of smoothly revolving worlds!
Worlds! Worlds there at the comet's heart,
worlds that were disk-shaped instead of spherical, a dozen or more of which
revolved in a great ring about a single world that was larger than any of the
others, and that hung motionless! Over those revolving worlds, down toward that
central disk-world the cube-ships ahead of us were fleeing, and as we shot down
after them I saw that it and the rim of other disks, though not illuminated by
the dusky crimson glow of the encompassing comet, were
bathed in light, pure white
143
light
that seemed to emanate from themselves! And as we rushed down toward the
surface of that central world I glimpsed upon it smooth dark ways and streets,
on each side of which were what seemed great, smooth-sided shallow pits;
glimpsed multitudes of dark, shapeless figures that moved to and fro along
those streets and ways, tending great mechanisms set up in masses here and
there along them; glimpsed a single great circular plaza or smooth-floored
clearing set amid those streets and pits and massed mechanisms, at the center
of which loomed a great, truncated dark pyramid upon whose flat summit rested
some big disk-shaped mechanism. Then in that same flashing glimpse I saw that
which drove all else from my mind, saw from the surface of all
this mighty world a tremendous swarm of great cube-ships that was
driving up toward the ships we pursued, and toward ourselves!
"Cube-ships!" Gor Han was crying. "Cube-ships in thousands, and they're
attacking us!"
"Back!" I cried. "Back up and outward! we have no chance against these thousands!"
But
before our cruisers could turn, before we could halt and slant back upward, the
thousands of leaping cubes from beneath were upon us! Then about us for a wild
moment was conflict indescribable, colossal cubes
rushing by thousands upon our hundreds of gleaming cruisers, crimson electrical
bolts and black force-beams whirling and stabbing in wild destruction. Cubes
thronged thick about us as our cruisers leapt upward, and then the thrumming of
the force-beams of our ship sounded as they drove paths of instant devastation
through the ruck of battle about us. From the speech-instrument there came
above the din of battle a wild cry. from Gor Han, and I saw that a crimson bolt
had grazed past his cruiser's stern, warping its whole side with its terrific
power and sending his craft swirling helplessly down to the world below! I
cried out at that sight, then saw Najus Nar's craft slant downward even as my
own struggled wildly with the cubes about it, saw the insect-man's cruiser
drive right and left with force-beams, as other cubes from beneath rushed up
toward it. Then as it shot downward among them to reach Gor Han's falling ship
it had crashed glancingly along the side of one of the uprushing cubes, and
144
with its
prow a twisted wreck of metal was whirling down also!
"Gor
Han! Najus Nar!" I shouted, as I saw them fall; then a deadly bolt of blinding
crimson fire flashed past our cruiser's walls, missing us only by inches; I
yelled crazily as the cube above that had loosed it was driven smashing-ly into
the battle whirl about us by our swift-leaping force-beam. But about us now our
cruisers were swiftly vanishing, as the hordes of cube-ships rushed upon them!
They were stabbing out with black beams to the bitter end, driving cubes down
to death with those beams, yet they were fast disappearing beneath the
withering hail of deadly crimson electrical bolts. But a score of cruisers
remained beside me, now but a dozen, as the crimson bolts still flashed thick,
Jurt Tills ship fighting side by side with my own. Then, as but a scant five or
six cruisers remained, the target of all the blasting bolts from the massed
cubes about us, there penetrated through the deafening roar of battle from the
speech-instrument Jurt Tul's great voice.
"Back
out of the comet!" he yelled. "It's our only chance, Khel Ken—to get
outside until the rest of the Patrol's cruisers arrive!"
I saw, even through my mad bloodlust at that
moment, that he was right and that our only chance of further action lay in
winning clear of the comet. "Back, then!" I cried.
With
the words our half-dozen cruisers zoomed upward and outward at such tremendous
velocity that the deadly bolts from the thousands of cubes beneath fell short
of us in our wild upward rush. Up—up—upward from that central world we shot, and
outward. The cube-ships beneath were taken by surprize for the moment, then
massed also and leapt up after us. And now, a scant six cruisers remaining of
all the thousand that had been our force a few minutes before, we raced out
from that central world, toward the darker circle in the distant coma's wall
that was the one passage to outside space. Out over the ring of revolving
disk-worlds we shot, out toward that opening, out—
But
what was that? That swarm of tiny, square shapes, of gleaming little cube-shapes,
which even at that distance we could see had darted suddenly from one side
across the dark circle of the single opening? Close-massed in a compact
145
swarm,
they had shot out from the side to halt across that
opening, hanging motionless there. Cube-ships, hundreds in number, that had
flashed toward that opening from one side, to hang motionless there across it,
while behind us there raced after us in deadly pursuit the other cube-ship
thousands! Cube-ships that hung motionless, ready, across that round opening
through the great coma, and at sight of which I cried aloud once more.
"They've cut us off—they're ahead of
us!" I cried. "They've
barred the one way to outside space and we're trapped here at the comet's
heart!"
Ill
The moment that followed, as our ships slowed and hung
motionless, with doom ahead and doom behind, was one in which the death that we
had dared a score of times since reaching the comet loomed full before us. The
cube-ships that barred the way ahead, the thousands racing toward us from
behind—these were like death's great jaws closing upon us, and for an instant I
felt myself surrendering to utter despair. But then, as my eyes dropped
downward, toward the ring of outer smaller disk-worlds over which we had been
flashing and above which we now hung, a flicker of hope shot through me and I
turned swiftly to the speech-instrument.
"Down to those worlds below!" I cried. "There's a chance that we can
hide on one of them until we can get out of the comet!" •
Instantly, spurred to greater swiftness by
our desperate situation, our half-dozen cruisers were slanting sharply down
toward one of those revolving disk-worlds. The surface of that world leapt up
with terrific speed toward us as we shot recklessly downward, and I sighted
cities of pits and streets and mechanisms like that of the central world upon
it, cities though that did not cover all its surface as in the central world,
but were scattered about it, the rest of the disk-world's surface being a
tumbled mass of mighty mountains and chasmed valleys, all of barren dark rock.
It was down toward one of these tremendous chasms, near the
146
disk-world's
outer edge, that we were heading, every feature of that world's surface lying
plain beneath us in the strange white light that bathed all these revolving
worlds. Downward into that awful chasm our cruisers shot, and as they did so I
glimpsed, high above, a swarm of tiny dark cube-shapes that had halted their
pursuit of us, were circling about and dropping lower as though to discover our
whereabouts!
Our
lives depended on finding some place of hiding in this tremendous-walled chasm,
I knew, and as we arrowed down into its depths, white-lit by the same strange
illumination, I gazed swiftly about for some place of concealment. A moment
the search seemed hopeless, there being nothing but the chasm's narrow floor of
barren rock, its towering jagged rock sides, and then as we shot along its
length I sighted a great crack or crevice in one of
them, a long, crack-like opening that was large enough to admit our cruisers,
and behind which could be glimpsed the dark depths of some great cavernous
hollow in the rock.
"Through that crack!" I ordered swiftly, saw Jurt Tul's cruiser
move quickly toward it, scraping against the crack's jagged edges as it pushed
through into the. dark cavern behind. Another of our
cruisers followed, and then the rest, one by one, until my own was scraping
inside, just as I saw the cube-ships high above dropping toward
us, splitting into divisions of a dozen ships each which were slanting down
over all the surface of this world in search of us, one of them heading
straight toward the
great chasm!
As
it slanted down toward us I gazed about me, saw that our six cruisers were
hanging in a dark, cavernous abyss that seemed to extend far down into the
depths of this disk-world. A rocky shelf just inside the crack-opening, though,
seemed large enough for us to rest our ships upon; so instantly we brought
them to rest there, cutting off the generators whose humming might betray us.
Then, as our space-doors opened with a slight inward hiss from the
higher-pressure air of the disk's atmosphere, I stepped quickly out, found Jurt
Tul and the other cruiser captains beside me, and then we had all suddenly crouched
down inside the great crack's edge as a score of the great cube-ships shot down
into the white-lit chasm outside.
Peering out from the cavern's dark depths we
saw those cubes hanging there, then moving slowly along the chasm's length as
though in search of us. Down its length they disappeared and we breathed easier
for a moment; then they reappeared, coming to rest on the chasm's floor
directly beneath the opening in which we crouched, scarce a half-hundred feet
below us. Tensely we watched, saw the doors were
opening in those cubes' sides, creatures emerging, the comet-creatures of these
strange worlds. And at sight of those creatures even our tense situation could
not suppress our gasps. For they were—liquid-creatures! Creatures whose bodies
were liquid instead of solid, creatures that were each but a pool of thick
black liquid, flowing visciously about, in each of which pools floated two
round, white blank disks, great white pupilless eyes.
We
saw them flowing forth from out their cubes, saw some whose viscous bodies held
what seemed tools or weapons, saw the floating eyes turned this way and that
about the chasm, as though in search of us. Then a score of the strange
creatures did an incomprehensible thing; they flowed together into a single
liquid mass, a great black pool in which floated all their eyes, their liquid
bodies mingling together! A moment they remained thus, then had separated, each
from the others, and were returning to their cubes.
"Conversing!"
whispered Jurt Tul beside me. "It's their method of conversing, of
exchanging thoughts—to mingle their liquid bodies one
with another!"
I knew the amphibian was right, and shuddered
involuntarily at the thing we had seen. The cubes' doors had closed now, and
the cubes were lifting upward from the chasm's floor. One, more suspicious
apparently than the rest, hovered a moment outside the crack within which we
crouched, and we shrank back, suddenly tense, but after a moment's inspection
it too had driven up after the others, which passed from sight high above,
searching slowly across the disk-world's surface in a strange formation as
though following some discussed plan. We breathed easier, then, standing erect,
and I turned quickly to Jurt Tul.
"Our
only chance is to get out of the comet and wait for the five thousand Patrol
cruisers that were to come after
148
us,"
I told him. "But we can't leave the comet with Gor Han and Najus Nar
prisoned in it!"
The
great amphibian shook his head. "We could venture back to the comet-city on
the central world to attempt to find them," he said, "but in this
brilliant white light we'd be seen and destroyed at once."
I
was silent, for I knew that it was so, and broodingly I considered that light,
whose white illumination filled all the great chasm outside, beating faintly
even into the cavern, yet seeming to have no visible source whatever. And then,
even as I gazed upon it, that light died! It seemed to gray, to darken, and
then had vanished altogether, within a moment, while at the same moment there
beat faintly through the air from far away a great clanging note like that of a
giant gong. The chasm outside, the world and worlds about us, lay now in dusk,
their only illumination the lurid, dark crimson light of the comet's glowing
coma, a red dusk that gave to the barren rocky world about us an inconceivably
weird appearance.
"That
gong!" Jurt Tul was saying. "You heard it? It sounded when the light
died—it means that these comet-creatures maintain and regulate their own day
and night!"
"That white light," I said;
"you mean that it's made by them, turned off for their night?"
He
nodded quickly. "It must be. They can use the coma's great electrical
energy to produce that light at will, just as they use that energy for their
crimson bolts. They must turn if off and on at regular intervals, to produce
their day and night, their activity-periods and rest-periods."
"But then we can venture back to the
comet-city—back to the central world for Gor Han and Najus Nar!" I exclaimed^
and he nodded.
"Yes, but we'd best wait longer, since
now the cube-ships' search will be going on, even in this dusk, and we'd have
small chance of escaping them."
For all my impatience I saw the wisdom of
Jurt Tul's suggestion and so composed myself to a longer period of waiting. So
hour followed hour while we crouched there in the great crack in the chasm's
wall. Far above we could see the crimson coma, against which there came and
went
149
now and
then divisions of cube-ships, still searching for the fugitives who had escaped
them. My thoughts turned to Gor Han and to Najus Nar, prisoned in the
comet-city, and then to our own predicament. But hours remained now in which
the comet might be turned aside, and unless we could escape from it, could meet
the five thousand cruisers that were racing toward it from the galaxy and lead
them inside, no power in all space and time could turn the comet aside from the
galaxy. And I could not, would not, attempt to escape from the comet without
having first learned the fate, at least, of Gor Han and Najur Nar.
At
last I stood upright, turned to Jurt Tul. "The cube-ships above seem to
have slackened their search," I told him, "and now's the time for our
venture. We've had hours now of this dusk, and the
light of their day may be turned on at any time."
He nodded, then
pointed out that his cruiser had been damaged somewhat in the battle over the
central world. So that it might not delay us we transferred his crew from it to
the others, Jurt Tul entering my own cruiser with me, while the damaged one we left there on the cavern's shelf. Then,
after we had closed our space-doors, our cruisers moved gently out of the
narrow opening, rising swiftly up over the disk-world from the chasm's depths.
That disk-world's surface lay beneath us, now, illumined
by the coma's far crimson glow alone, a lurid luminescence that picked out
streaks and veins of metal here and there in the jagged rock. It was plain,
indeed, that these worlds were meteoric in nature, and had been formed and set
spinning in this orderly fashion by the comet-creatures themselves.
For the time, though, we heeded not these
things, intent on the scene ahead as our five cruisers shot silently through
the lurid dusk toward the central world. Far away, now and then, against the
coma's baleful glow, we caught sight of cube-ships moving still restlessly
about in search of us, and once a party of these seemed to take up our course,
to follow us. These, though, veered away in the dusk behind us, and then in a
moment more we had passed above that ring of outer disk-worlds, and Jurt Tul
and I, gazing forward from the control room, could make out the great,
motionless mass of the central world beneath us, the world
150
that was
our goal. No light gleamed upon its darkened surface, lying in a weird picture
there in the coma's crimson dusk. As we shot down toward it I saw vaguely in
that dusk the great, massed machines here and there, the smooth streets, the
enigmatic pits about them, and then the great clearing at the flat world's
center.
"That clearing!" I whispered to Jurt Tul. "It was near it that Gor Han's and Najus
Nar's ships fell—we'll land near it."
Our
cruisers now were arrowing smoothly down toward one of the broader streets some
distance from the clearing, since we could see now that on all the world below
there moved only an occasional dark liquid-creature, the throngs we had seen
before having unaccountably disappeared. Here and there above it moved a
cube-ship, but none of these glimpsed us through the dusk, and in a moment more
our cruisers had landed gently upon one of the smooth streets. There Jurt Tul
and I swiftly stepped forth, for we had decided that we two alone could explore
the comet-city more silently than a larger party. At once the cruisers swept
back to wait for us in the dusk above, ready to make an attempt to escape from
the comet should we be discovered. Then the amphibian and I moved swiftly
along that silent street toward the great central plaza.
On
each side of us loomed great massed machines at which we merely glanced as we
hurried on. As we passed one of the pits that had puzzled me, though, I stepped
to its edge, gazed down, then shrank back in horror!
For in that shallow, smooth-walled pit there lay what seemed a great pool of
thick black liquid unguessably deep, a pool formed by the liquid bodies of
hundreds, perhaps thousands, of the liquid comet-creatures that had poured into
it! I could glimpse the white eyes floating in it, here and there, but there
was no other sign of life or movement in the mass, and as I saw that and
thought of the rows upon rows of other similar pits that extended across the
comet-city, I understood, and turned swiftly to Jurt Tul.
"Sleeping!" I exclaimed. "In their night, their
rest-period, they must all pour into these pits together—mingling their liquid
bodies!"
Swiftly we shrank back from the great pit,
moved on toward the clearing. Massed machines, grim and gleaming
151
and
towering, loomed all about us, half seen in the crimson 1 dusk, and we passed scores of the great,
liquid-filled pits in ' which slept the comet-creatures, but there was no sign
of our two friends. Had they been destroyed? Dread filled me, dread intensified
because I realized that soon the comet-creatures would be ending their night,
and turning on their white light of day, discovering us there on their world.
Then, abruptly, Jurt Tul jerked me back from my forward stride, crouching
silently with me upon the street, behind a mass of great mechanisms. For out of
the darkness to our right had come the sound of something moving, something
approaching us! Silently, tensely, we crouched there, and saw a dark shape
moving stealthily down one of the branching streets toward us. It had turned
from us, toward the great clearing ahead, when unexpectedly, as we crouched, my arm had brushed against the great machine
beside us and touched something that moved beneath the touch, with a loud
metallic clicking. Instantly that dark shape ahead had turned, and then was
leaping straight toward us!
Before we could rise to meet it the rush of
it had borne us downward, and as it did so I realized with a wild thrill that
it was not a liquid-creature but a great and warm and fur-covered being,
many-limbed, that had attacked us! Even as that fact penetrated into my brain
our struggle had abruptly ceased, and we were staggering erect, Jurt Tul and I
grasping the other.
"Gor Han!" I exclaimed. "It's
you!"
The great Betelgeusan's fur-covered body and
strange features were clearly visible to us now as he grasped our own hands,
his eyes wide.
"Khel Ken! Jurt Tul!" he whispered.
"I thought you destroyed in the battle!"
"We hid—escaped," I explained to
him swiftly. "But you, Gor Han—how have you escaped?—and where's Najus
Nar?"
He was silent a moment, then suddenly dragged
us down into the deeper shadow of the great machines beside us. There, with the
lurid light of the coma on his strange features, he spoke swiftly.
"Najus Nar is-living," he said,
"but I will tell you what came upon us. You saw our ships fall in the
battle over
152
the
city here, crashing down into it. At once these liquid comet-creatures were
upon us, most of our crews having been killed in the crash, and but a few were
left; but these being injured, too, they annihilated them with crimson bolts
before we realized it, leaving but Najus Nar and myself, whom they wished,
apparently, to question. Us they secured by metal bonds to one of the great
machines, then came to us with little metal models, made of what seemed plastic
gleaming metal, which could change instantaneously through a myriad different
forms at their operation, and which they used for a rough communication with
us. And through these and the things they explained to us, we learned, Najus
Nar and I, something of the purpose and the past of
these comet-creatures.
"Eons
they had dwelt upon the central worlds of this giant comet that roamed the
outer void, shaping those worlds to their will as it flashed on. They had used
the coma's electrical energy for their own weapons, and had used it to produce
light-vibrations, a white light which diey turned on and off for their day and
night. The coma's energy, indeed, was the source of all their world's
activities, but as their giant comet plunged on through space, that energy,
ever shot backward in the tail that drove the comet on, was dissipated faster
and faster, the coma waning and dying as all comets wane and die in time. But
one thing could save them: to absorb into the coma vast quantities of matter,
which would be converted instantly into electrical energy to replenish the
coma. Not far from the great comet at that time loomed a vast universe of suns,
and if the comet were to crash through the universe its suns and worlds would
replenish their waning coma and save their comet from death. They needed but to
change the comet's course, to send it toward the universe instead of passing
it, and to do this they set up a great comet-control.
"This
comet-control was set on the top of a truncated pyramid in a clearing at the
central world's center. It was a great horizontal disk, set parallel to their
disk world, with a pointer that could be moved at will around the disk-dial.
The position of the pointer, by means of great projectors to which it was
connected, controlled the position of the comet's tail. If the pointer was at
the dial's rear the
153
tail
would be shot forth from the great coma's rear also, driving it forward through
space. If they turned the pointer to the left the tail would shoot from the
coma's left, driving the comet to the right. They could thus, by means of the
comet-control and the great projectors which controlled the tail's position,
drive the comet in any direction,, at will. The only
thing they could not do with it was to reverse the comet-control, to shoot out
a new tail opposite to the old one, since the momentum or pressure of the new
one would crush and annihilate the coma and its worlds between their great
pressures. They could drive the comet to right or left at will, though, which
was all that they needed, since now they drove it toward the universe of suns
near them.
"Onward
the giant comet drove to that universe, and soon crashed through it, its suns
and worlds being sucked into the gigantic coma and annihilated there, converted
instantly into electrical energy which restored the waning coma's glory. So
onward through space with renewed power it flashed, through the great void
between the galaxies, until ages later when its coma was again waning they
drove it toward another universe, crashed through it likewise. And so through
the eons, as ever the comet's glory, the coma's power,
has waned, they have driven it through another universe, destroying that
universe to restore it. On though the limitless void of outer space they have
driven it, a cosmic vampire looting the life of universes to restore its own!
And now, when the comet's glory has again waned, they have turned it toward our
own galaxy, to destroy it as they have done countless others. And within less
than a scant half-dozen hours now the comet will have thundered so close to our
galaxy that no power in existence can turn it aside!
"All this we heard from the
comet-creatures' communication with us, and then they proposed that we cast in
our lot with them, forgetting our doomed universe, and help them build great
cruisers and force-beam apparatus like those with which we had fought them. I
refused, of course, not wishing to live under any conditions after our galaxy's
death, but to my honor Najus Nar accepted the proposal! He joined them, not
listening to my frantic words,
154
and went
away with them, leaving me in despair. Then when the gong sounded across their
worlds that marked the end of the white light and the beginning of this night,
I began to work frantically with the metal bonds that held me to the great
machine, twisting and untwisting them until at last, but minutes ago, I managed
to break them. They had counted on the bonds holding me, and had left no guard
over me, so at once I started off toward the central clearing, toward the great
comet-control, for a desperate last attempt at turning the comet aside with it.
I heard you crouching there, thought you comet-creatures and sprang at you, and
the rest you know."
When Gor Han's deep whisper had ceased we
were silent a moment, and surely never did stranger trio
crouch in stranger place than we three, earth-man and amphibian Al-debaranian
and great fur-clad Betelgeusan, there in the crimson dusk of the comet-city,
all about us the pits that held its countless liquid-creatures and above us the
glowing red coma which encompassed this world and was driving on toward our
galaxy's doom. At last I broke the silence.
"Najus Nar with the comet-creatures!" I whispered. "It's impossible! In all
its record there have been no traitors in the Interstellar Patrol!"
Gor
Han looked steadily, compassionately, at me. "It is so, Khel Ken," he
said. "I would not believe it had I not seen it myself."
"Najus
Nar!" I repeated, again, then gathered myself.
"There's but one thing to do," I said swiftly, "and that's for
us three to make the attempt you planned, Gor Han, to get to the comet-control
in the clearing and turn it, then destroy it before they can turn it
back!"
We rose, paused. "There are comet-guards
at the pyramid's base and summit, I know," said Gor Han, "but if we
can overcome them before this night-period ends we'll succeed!"
Swiftly we moved forward, now, down the
street through the dusk toward the great clearing. Mighty machines looming in
the red dusk on each side of us, dark pits yawning between them in which the
comet-hordes lay silent, glowing crimson coma that swung above—these made an
incon-
155
ceivably
weird scene about us through which we three, 1 a weird and dissimilar enough trio in that lurid dusk, moved •] rapidly on. Once we saw a few of the
liquid-creatures J flowing
across one of the streets ahead, shrank back until j they had disappeared, then moved swiftly on.
One or two ! cube-ships slid
by above, too, but these did not spy us, and in a few minutes more we had
emerged from the mass of machines and pits into the great flat-floored circular
plaza at the city's center, the truncated pyramid rising vaguely from it in the
crimson dusk.
"The guards!" whispered Gor Han.
"There at the pyramid's base!"
I
gazed, saw that a great notched stair or flight of narrow steps ran up the pyramid's side, and that at its foot were some
four dark liquid-shapes, lying motionless, but with weapons of some sort,
bolt-containers I did not doubt, held in the grasp of their viscous fluid
bodies. A moment we hesitated, then crept out across
the clearing toward them. They seemed not aware of our approach, and still
nearer we crept stealthily, approaching them from a side, until just when we
were within feet of them, one seemed to flow swiftly toward us for an instant,
then back, at the same time training his deadly weapon upon us! Before he could
loose the crashing bolts from it, though, we had sprung upon them!
The
combat that followed at the pyramid's base was the most horrible, I think, that ever I engaged in. I had grasped at the body of one of the
things but instantly felt the viscous liquid body withdraw from my grasp, flow
away from me, while I struggled in vain for some hold upon it. Then I glimpsed Gor Han with his four great arms gripping one of the viscous
things and hurling it against the pyramid's side before it could evade his
grasp, shattering it into
liquid black splashes
there. The thing I strugged with had gripped me in turn, now, and was like
fluid steel in the strength with which it held me. I felt a powerful viscous
arm tightening about my neck, while others pinioned my arms, felt that grasp
tightening, strangling me, and then it was abruptly torn from me as Gor Han
lifted and flung it likewise! I rose, staggering, to see that of the four
comet-creatures only black splashes here and there about us remained, Gor Han
and Jurt Tul having annihilated them with their mighty limbs.
156
"Up to the pyramid's summit!" I choked, stumbling toward the stair's
base. "We've a chance to win yet!"
The
others were rushing toward the stair with me, and then suddenly, as we set foot
upon it, we stopped short. For in the air about us, sounding out across all the central world and the worlds about it, had clanged
the note of a mighty gong! I heard Gor Han and Jurt Tul cry out at that sound,
but in the next instant brlliant white light had sprung into being about us,
the light of the comet-creatures' day suddenly turned on, bathing all things in
their world in its revealing glare! And as we staggered there almost blinded by
that brilliance, from the streets about us comet-creatures were flowing into
the great clearing, liquid black comet-creatures in countless hordes from the
pits of the mighty city. Even as they poured into the clearing they saw us,
those on the pyramid's summit had also glimpsed us, and then from above and
from all about the comet-creatures in countless thousands were rushing upon
us!
IV
There
was a wild cry from Gor
Han. "They've come out—it's the end of their night! And the end for
us!"
The end for us! It seemed so in that instant,
the great hordes of comet-creatures flowing in toward us from all the
clearing's sides, from the pyramid's summit down toward us, the suddenly
aroused cube-ships darting across the city toward us from far away. Then, even
in that split-second of terror, I saw
rushing toward us among those liquid-hordes a figure at sight of which I forgot
even the doom that was upon us, an erect, manylimbed, familiar insect-figure as
tall almost as myself, at sight of which I uttered a great cry.
"Najus
Nar!" My great shout reached him even across the wild confusion and din of
that moment, and I saw him gaze full toward us, his strange face
expressionless, then rush on toward us without sign of recognition, one with
the hordes of comet-creatures about him! I heard a gasp of unbelief as Jurt Tul
beside me saw also, heard the crazy yell of great Gor Han as with eyes crimson
he stepped forward to throw himself against those onrushing comet-crea-
157
tures,
then was conscious that great dark shapes had swooped down from behind us,
hovering momentarily beside us. They were our five cruisers!
Their
space-doors were already wide, and in the next instant, just before the
comet-creatures were upon us, we had tumbled inside, were rocketing upward
above the city pursued by scores of brilliant crimson bolts, two of which found
their marks and sent two of our ships into flaring death. The cruiser into
which we three had rushed, though, and the other two remaining ones, were
racing up now above the white-lit central world, with the countless cubes
rising swiftly after us, forming in a great crescent-formation behind us as
they flashed after us across the ringed worlds toward the coma's wall!
"They're
going to drive us straight into the coma itself!" cried Gor Han above the
din of our generators as we flung madly on.
I
saw in the same moment that it was so, that the great crescent of thousands of
cube-ships that had risen to destroy us were not overhauling us, behind, but
were driving us onward without chance of escape sidewise or downward, this
time. The glowing wall loomed before us, and the single circular opening in
that wall was guarded still by hundreds of other cube-ships, hanging in a solid
mass across it. We could not escape through that opening, even had we desired
escape, nor could we evade the relentless pursuit behind us, and inevitably
within seconds more we would be driven into instant annihilation! Driven to our
own deaths by the cubes behind us! This I saw, and in that instant of cold despair
could have plunged on into that annihilating death, but then wild anger surged
up in me and I whirled to Gor Han and Jurt Tul and the pilot beside them.
"Drive straight toward the
opening!" I shouted. "Straight
into the cube-ships there! If this is the end we'll take some of them,
at least, with us!"
A fierce cry from the Betelgeusan, a reckless
laugh from the amphibian, answered me as our three ships shot forward in that
moment like things of light toward the cube-ships massed across the opening.
Nearer we flashed toward them, nearer toward the hundreds of crimson bolts
which in another moment would blast us, nearer—but look! look!
Those hun-
158
dreds
of waiting ships had turned suddenly from us, had turned about and disregarding
us were loosing their crimson bolts into the great passage-opening through the
coma behind them, were falling back toward us from that opening, with red
bolts blasting toward it! And then out of that opening after them came the
things at which they fired, mass upon mass of long, shining shapes, of great,
long cruisers, that burst forth from the opening in
hundreds, in thousands, loosing upon the battling cubes a myriad of black
shafts of the force-beams which in a moment more had driven them down and back
in shattered masses of wreckage!
"Cruisers! Cruisers of the
Interstellar Patrol!"
We
were all shouting madly, then. Cruisers, the five thousand cruisers that had
been sent out after our own thousand and that now, at the last, had found their
way inside the comet in time to save us! They were shooting toward our own,
massing about us, and then as from our bows flashed the signal that was mine as
Chief of the Patrol, they were massing swiftly behind
us, battle-formation again in long parallel lines, with our own ship at their
head!
"Back to the central world!" I cried, my eyes
upon the time dial set before me. "We've minutes left yet to get to that
comet-control!"
Cruisers
massed together, we were leaping back, now, back toward the spinning worlds,
and toward the great crescent-formation of cube-ships that faced us now. Before
those thousands of cube-ships had grasped what had happened, before they could
turn, could change their formation, our compact mass had driven into them. Then
cruiser thousands and cube-ship thousands were spinning and striking and
mingling together, smiting with black force-beams and crimson bolts in titanic
battle inside the tremendous electrical coma, whirling and stabbing in awful
combat, the comet-creatures for their comet and we for our universe! Comet and
galaxy had come to grips at last as those two huge fleets caught and struck at
each other!
Cubes and cruisers swirled and ran about us
as our own cruiser struggled through the wild ruck of the battle, our own black
beams stabbing to smash back cubes before and beside us, while through the
speech-instruments before me
159
I cried orders to my mighty fleet, directing
the masses of cruisers that leapt and struck and soared at the great square
cubes about us. All space outside seemed a single giant mass of struggling
cubes and cruisers, cut across by blasting crimson bolt and ebon beam, yet ever
we were forcing the cubeships back, back over their ring of revolving
disk-worlds, back over their mighty central world, and then down toward it as
they fought fiercely against our black beams which drove great paths of
destruction through them!
The surface of that world was looming clearer
beneath us, bathed in white revealing light, as the giant battle swung lower
down toward it. I glimpsed the great circular clearing, the pyramid with the
mechanism and comet-guards on its summit, knew by the dial before me that but
minutes still remained to turn aside with it the colossal on-thundering comet.
Lower we swung toward the clearing, and as we did so the cubes beneath
stiffened against us, their uprushing hail of deadly red bolts stabbing like an
upward-falling rain of crimson death! But still more deadly were the black
beams that drove down through them from our ships, and they were giving a
little before us, sinking lower still, when suddenly from the surface of the
world below there rose up among them another cube, one vastly greater than any
of the others, one that moved ponderously up to the center of the cube-ship
fleet and then glowed suddenly with a brilliant light. And as it did so the
thousands of cube-ships beneath us suddenly vanishedl Disappeared from sight as
though they had never been, leaving below us only the spot of brilliant light
that marked the greater cube!
"That great cube!" Jurt Tul was crying. "It's a
vibration-projector of some kind, one whose vibrations make invisible all the
cube-ships around it and leave our ships and all else visible! And they're
attacking now!"
For even at that moment, as we stared
dumfounded toward the place where the cube-ship fleet had vanished, there had
come from beneath and beside us hundreds upon hundreds of crimson bolts, bolts
that flashed seemingly out of empty space annihilating scores, hundreds, of our
bewildered ships, bolts from the cube-ships which we could not see, but which
were circling about us now loosing their terrific
160
shafts of
death upon us! A battle to the death between two mighty fleets, one invisible,
the other a plain target! Out in all directions our black beams were wildly
whirling, but we could loose them only by chance, while our own ships, a
perfect target to the invisible cubes about us, were flaring in annihilation in
ever-increasing numbers!
"That great projector-cube!" I shouted to Gor Han. "Our only chance
is to get to it—destroy it!"
I
pointed down toward the spot of brilliant light beneath, which marked the
position of the great cube that was projecting the vibrations that made our
enemies invisible. But even as I did so a half hundred cruisers of our fleet
had massed together, shooting downward in a great wedge, through a withering
hail of crimson bolts, down through invisible cubes through which they
crashed, down until an instant later the score remaining of them had crashed
squarely into the spot of brilliant light below, meeting annihilation with it
in that collision. But the light vanished as they crashed, leaving but wreckage
of cube and cruisers, and at the same moment the mass of cube-ships beneath us
had suddenly flashed into full view once more!
Our great fleet was gathering itself now for
a last final rush downward through those opposing cubeships toward the
comet-control. I could hear the wild victorious shouts of Gor Han and Jurt Tul
and the crew beneath loud in my ears, could see the pyramid's summit, the great
control, close beneath, as I turned to the speech-instrument to shout the word
that would send our fleet thundering down. But before ever my
lips opened I had stiffened, stood motionless. For from the time-dial
before me had come the low, metallic note of the passing hour, marking the end
of the last moment in which the comet could have been turned aside! Marking the
end for our universe, sounding in my stunned ears like a titanic knell of doom
across the infinite for our galaxy! Nothing now in all the
universe could turn the giant comet aside from that galaxy enough to save it!
Motionless there, Gor Han and Jurt Tul and I heard echoing away that muted note
that had struck for the galaxy's doom!
"Lost!" Gor Han was saying it, strangely, slowly, un-comprehendingly.
"We've lost!"
161
Lost! The galaxy—our suns—our myriad peopled
worlds —all lost, all doomed to annihilation by the gigantic comet about us
that was thundering on now irrevocably! It seemed, in that instant, that all
things in existence, the cruisers about us, the cube-ships beneath us, the
comet-creature hordes on the surface of the white-lit world below, had paused
for one moment breathless, a moment that marked a galaxy's doom. Then suddenly
Gor Han was pointing downward, eyes staring, pointing to the comet-creature
hordes on that world below, which were suddenly rushing crazily toward the
pyramid beneath us, the cube-ships also racing wildly down toward the pyramid's
summit! For on that summit from the stair on the pyramid's side a dark, erect
figure had suddenly rushed, and before the comet-guards had glimpsed him had
rushed to the great disk-dial and pointer of the comet-control! An erect,
manylimbed dark figure who had seized the pointer in
his grasp!
"Najus
Nar!" Gor
Han's great scream held within it all our renewed faith, our sudden
comprehension.
For the insect-man had grasped the pointer,
the pointer that controlled the position of the giant comet's tail, and had
swung it half around the disk from the dial's rear to its front! As he did so
he straightened, arms upflung toward us in a last great gesture toward the
distant opening through the coma, and then the comet-guards were upon him, the
blasting crimson bolts from the darting cubes above had reached him,
annihilating the pyramid's summit, while in all the city beneath us liquid
comet-creatures and great cubes were rushing crazily toward that pyramid,
rushing too late toward the control which they had themselves built for their
comet and which now had destroyed them!
For
Najus Nar had reversed the comet-control!
Even as the bolts had blasted the pyramid's
top our cruisers had shot with the velocity of thousands of light-speeds out
from the central world and those about it, out across the comet's heart toward
the circular opening through the coma, through that passage of crimson death at
awful speed and out into space behind the comet as the passage closed behind
us, as the tail behind the comet waned swiftly! And as our cruisers shot up
above the mighty comet, we saw that it had halted in space, the awful momentum
with
162
which the
old tail at the rear had driven it on balanced, opposed, by the new tail shot
from its front, toward die galaxy, when Najus Nar had reversed the control!
Caught between the two cosmic pressures, between the momentum and terrific
speed with which the old tail drove it forward and the power with which the new
tail drove it backward, the mighty coma beneath us was bulging, was spreadingl
Bulging outward above and below, to right and to left, its giant
crimson-glowing coma dilating and breaking up between the terrific pressures
from front and rear! Changing from a great sphere to a gigantic shapeless
crimson mass of electrical energy, bulging out in all directions, great flashes
of leaping light inside it marking the end of the great comet-worlds caught and
annihilated inside its tortured mass! Out—out—it swelled, our cruisers hanging
far above it, watching it grow swiftly greater, thinner, until in moments more where the colossal crimson comet had been was
nothing but a vast, far-flung cloud of faint electrical radiance, the concentrated
electrical energy that had been the giant comet and its worlds dispersed out
into that huge, faint-shining cloud!
The cosmic vampire that had
threatened the life of our universe was gone forever! The comet-drivers had
driven their comet and its worlds, at last, to death!
V
Sweeping in toward the galaxy's gathered suns, days
later, our great cruiser fleet slowed, halted, hung
motionless outside the galaxy's edge once more. Before us flamed great white
Rigel, as it had flamed—how long it seemed before!— when Gor Han and Jurt Tul
and Najus Nar had gathered in the control room of my cruiser, at the start of
our mad journey toward the comet. Now that comet was but a vast, faint cloud of
radiance far in the void behind us. And now, too, it was Gor Han and Jurt Tul
that stood before me, in the cruiser's silent control room.
The cruisers about us had
massed into two great divisions, since here at the galaxy's edge Gor Han and
Jurt Tul were to leave me, taking up once more their duties in the
163
ceaseless
watch of the Interstellar Patrol, with for me my work as Chief in the
headquarters at Canopus. The frantic joy that would be shaking the galaxy's
people to see the shadow of doom thus lifted from them, the frantic gratitude
that we might claim—in these we had no interest now, wanting only to take up
once more the great Patrol's endless work. So now the cruisers of my two
friends hung waiting beneath my own, as we paused in silence at the moment of
parting.
Gor Han's deep voice broke the silence at
last. "The end of the journey, for us," he said. "And
for Najus Nar—?"
"For
Najus Nar, too," I said. "He dared and died, for the
galaxy—pretending to join the comet-creatures that he might thwart their plans
at the last—and he would have wished no other end."
Jurt Tul nodded slowly. "Najus Nar would
have wished it," he said. "Yet strange it seems,
that we four of the Patrol are three, at last."
Silent
we stood again, at that, and then Gor Han and Jurt Tul reached forth,
Betelgeusan and Aldebaranian and Earth-man clasping hands in a moment's grip.
They had turned, had saluted sharply, and were striding down through the
cruiser toward their own ships, which with a clang of metal moved away from
beneath my own. Gor Han's to the right, Jurt Tul's to the left, they moved,
heading each the massed cruisers there, and then those cruisers were moving
away, to right and left along the galaxy's edge, passing and vanishing. My
single cruiser hung alone in the void, the pilot beside me with hand on its
controls, but for a moment I paused still, gazing back through the blackness of
the great void toward a far, faint-shining cloud that glimmered in the
blackness. A long moment I gazed toward it, then turned. And then our cruiser
too was moving, in over the galaxy's edge, in toward great Canopus through its
gathered, flaming suns.
THE COSMIC CLOUD
We three stared at the Chief across the metal desk for
a moment before I broke the silence.
164
"But it's incredible!" I exclaimed.
"You must be mistaken, sir—nothing in the galaxy could cause a thing like
that!"
Jhul
Din and Korus Kan nodded in agreement beside me, but the Chief of the
Interstellar Patrol shook his head.
"Yet
something in the galaxy is causing it, Dur Nal," he said. "I
tell you that this thing has taken thousands of interstellar ships in the last
few days without giving us any clue to its cause!"
Slowly
I shook my head. "I don't doubt what you say, sir," I told him,
"but it seems impossible."
The
four of us were sitting in a small metal-walled room through whose window came the red light of mighty Betel-geuse, the sun upon one
of whose planets we were. The room was part of the Betelgeuse headquarters of
the Interstellar Patrol, and to it but hours before from the great central
headquarters at Canopus had come Lacq Larus, Chief of the Patrol. His first act
had been to summon our cruiser, which had been patrolling off Betelgeuse, and
he sat considering us now, a great plant-man of Capella whose strange green
fibrous body was tense and whose green-pupiled eyes were unmoving as he faced
us.
Jhul
Din and Korus Kan and I sat across the desk from him. Jhul Din was of Spica, a
big powerful crustacean-man, his strong body armored in black shell, his quick
eyes protruding. Korus Kan, of Antares, was typical of that star's races, his
upright man-like body being of metal, with lenslike eyes, a tireless
body-machine in which his living brain was cased. I, Earth-man, completed the
trio, and though the members of the Interstellar Patrol are from every peopled
sun no stranger three in appearance could have been found in it.
Lacq Larus had been looking thoughtfully out
of the window across the teeming world of Betelgeusans outside, but turned and
again faced us. "I will explain to you the whole situation," he said,
"for it's imperative that you three understand
it.
"As you know, our galaxy is a great
swarm of suns floating in the vast gulf of space, each with its own worlds and
peoples. All, of course, are ruled by the Federation of Suns, and all are
policed by our own Interstellar Patrol. Back and forth between these suns has
gone the galaxy's interstellar
165
commerce for
ages, countless thousands of great space-ships plying from sun to sun without
hindrance. But now at last this great commerce of the galaxy is threatened with
disaster!
"That
threat lies in what we have always known as the cosmic cloud, a vast cloud of
utter darkness that lies, as you know, near the
galaxy's center. It has always lain there, a
tremendous area of utter blackness billions of miles in extent, and of it our
scientists have been able to say with certainty only that it is a tremendous
region where the light-vibrations are simply non-existent.
"More
than that none could say, for no ship can venture into that region without
plunging into absolute lightlessness, so that none knows what may lie inside.
It is true that some years ago one of the galaxy's scientists, Zat Zanat by
name, ventured into the cloud to explore it in a ship with some assistants,
having some new theory concerning it which he wished to test. But this
scientist, one of the scientists of the sun of Deneb, never emerged from it and
without doubt met death in it as many luckless ships in the past have done.
"None other has ever desired to
penetrate into the great cloud and the galaxy's interstellar ships have always
routed their course far around it, to escape the danger. But suddenly, a few
days ago, hundreds of ships passing near the great cloud in space were drawn
abruptly into it by some titanic and irresistible force. Their calls for help
came to our distance-phones and a score of cruisers of the Patrol were rushed to
the cloud's edge to investigate. But they found that the unfortunate swarms of
ships had vanished inside it by then, their calls ceasing soon after, and there
was no trace of what force had whirled them in!
"Instantly warnings were broadcast to
all interstellar ships to avoid the neighborhood of the cloud. The cruisers of
the Patrol then reconnoitered completely around it for more than a day, finding
nothing unusual. At last we were convinced that it was some great
ether-disturbance that had whirled the luckless ships inside, and orders were
given that the space-lanes around the cloud were again safe. Yet the
interstellar traffic had been streaming around it for no more than a few hours
when the thing was repeated, and more than a thou-
166
sand
other great ships were drawn with terrific power and swiftness into the great
blackness.
"Again
all traffic around the cloud was suspended and again a squadron of Interstellar
Patrol cruisers flashed to the scene. But they found nothing more this time, no
sign of what had caused the great disaster. For two days we waited, though, but
the cruisers there reported all as usual. So with some misgivings we yielded to
the clamor from the galaxy's suns and allowed the ships again to route their
course around the great blackness. A day passed without mishap and we began to
breathe easier. And then the thing struck again, and again, but hours ago, more
than a thousand ships with all inside them were whirled into the great cloud's
darkness.
"This
third disaster has caused something like a panic across the galaxy. All realize
now that interstellar traffic around the cloud must be suspended until the
thing is cleared up, and since the cloud lies almost at the galaxy's center
that means the crippling of our interstellar commerce. Always, in time of great
peril, the galaxy's peoples have turned to the Interstellar Patrol to save
them. They are turning to us now to bring an end to this great threat, and we
of the Patrol must not fail them."
Lacq Larus halted for a moment and as he did so
the three of us were on our feet.
"When do we start for the cloud,
sir?" asked Jhul Din quietly.
The Chief smiled. "You have guessed
it," he said. "I have summoned you here to Betelgeuse,
have come here from Canopus to meet you because it is on you three that I now
rely. You, Dur Nal and Korus Kan and Jhul Din, saved all this
galaxy once, when you dared outside our universe to other universes to thwart
those who would have loosed death on us.
"I am asking you, therefore, to dare
again for the galaxy, to endeavor to find what force it is that has whirled
those thousands of ships into the blackness of the cosmic cloud. I dare not
send a number of cruisers there, for all may be lost like the others. I do not
even give you an order to go, for it means certain death if that force
manifests itself again and draws you into the cloud. But if you can explore
around its
167
edges you
may be able with your recording-instruments to find out what great
ether-disturbance or unknown force it is that has caused these terrible
calamities, may save the galaxy from greater ones. I say again though that it
is not an order. If you, Dur Nal and your two lieutenants wish to go in your
cruiser it is well, but if you do not wish to you need not. What say you?"
He was looking at me fixedly, but my eyes
were on the time-dial on my wrist.
"We
should reach the cloud's edge within ten hours," was all I said.
Minutes later our cruiser was slanting up at
mounting speed from that swarming world of Betelgeusans, our crew rushing about
its throbbing generators and Korus Kan and Jhul Din and I in its pilot room.
With Korus Kan at the wheel the long ship rose through the glare of the great
crimson sun and threaded through the masses of interstellar shipping until it
was speeding through the black gloom of space, with all about us the shining
hosts of the galaxy's suns.
Far ahead there stood out against the farther
stars what seemed a small black spot in the galaxy's star-swarm. It was, we
knew, the colossal cosmic cloud of darkness absolute into which thousands of
ships had been drawn to some strange fate, and whose secret, if secret there
were, we must discover. With the cruiser's hull quivering slightly and with the
generators beneath talking louder we hurtled at thousands of light-speeds
across the galaxy toward that lightless region.
Hour upon hour our cruiser flew like a thing
of thought through the vast spaces toward the cloud. At the highest speed safe
to use inside the galaxy we were traveling, and as we drew nearer the cloud's
edge our space-chart showed that no other ships were in space about us now, all
avoiding the cloud's strange menace. But our own craft hurtled steadily on, and
steadily the vast region of blackness grew greater in the firmament before us.
In
the cruiser's instrument room Jhul Din and I prepared the intricate
recording-instruments on which the success of our venture depended. These were
mechanisms connected to various indicators outside the hull, which recorded all
168
ether-currents and drifts and disturbances around the ship, all electrical or
radioactive or other forces, and all conditions of temperature and pressure.
If
it was really some unheard-of and recurring force or some tremendous
ether-disturbance that had swept the luckless ships into the cloud, we should
be able to determine its nature and source with these aids.
From
the instrument room's window Jhul Din and I watched the great cloud largen as
we neared it. It seemed soon like a colossal black curtain across the universe,
blotting half the galaxy's suns from sight, stretching across billions of
miles. What mysteries did that vast and enigmatic region of lightlessness
contain?
At
last Korus Kan's voice came down through the order-phone from the pilot room.
"We're within two million miles of the cloud's edge," he reported.
"What orders?"
"Turn
right and coast at a hundred light-speeds along its edge," I told him.
"Jhul Din and I will start our observations, and I'll let you know when
to change course or speed."
He
assented briefly, and in the next moment we saw through the window that the
gigantic black curtain of the cloud was sliding sidewise as our cruiser toned
in space to coast along its edge. At once Jhul Din and I began our work.
Bending over the dials of the recording-instruments, the Spican and I made
quick readings as the ship moved on.
All
ether-conditions outside the cruiser seemed normal, however, with no strong
currents or maelstroms anywhere near us. Nor were our other instruments more
enlightening, for none registered any unusual force. For more than an hour,
while Korus Kan held the cruiser in a steady course along the cloud's edge, we
kept to our watch of the dials, but with no greater result.
I
turned from the instruments to the window, shaking my head. "I'm afraid
it's useless, Jhul Din," I said. "It never was but a slender chance
that we might find anything this way, and I'm afraid it has failed."
He
looked thoughtfully with me toward the vast black wall of darkness. "Yet
it's our one chance to learn anything," he said. "It may be that on
the cloud's other side we could discover something."
1
I
"We'll
have to try it, but I don't place much faith in it," ' I told him. "Whatever it is about the
cloud has caused those—"
With
stunning force I was hurled slantwise across the instrument room to strike in
one of its corners, Jhul Din flung with me. The next instant saw the room's
walls spinning madly around us and rattling us inside them like peas in a box.
There were hoarse cries from the generator rooms and a wild uproar through all
the cruiser as with awful speed and force it was whirled over and over.
Bruised and half dazed, I retained enough
presence of mind to clutch at the rail of the pilot room stair as I was thrown
against it, and as Jhul Din was flung past me a moment later I grasped and held his arm. Together we struggled up into
the pilot room, where we glimpsed Korus Kan clinging to the wheel-standard as
the room gyrated about him.
"The cloud!" he cried. "It's the force they told us of—it's
drawing us into the cloud!" "Into the cloud!"
The cold of outside space seemed about us in
the fear that for a moment held us, for as we looked from the windows of the
whirling pilot room we saw instantly that the Antarian was right. Our cruiser
was hurtling at tremendous speed straight toward the vast region of darkness we
had been coasting.
"Turn on full power!" I cried.
"Try to bring the ship out of this, Korus Kan!"
"I can't!" he shouted back.
"I've got every generator on full but the cruiser doesn't obey its wheel!
It's some colossal magnet or magnetic force inside the cloud that's drawing
us!"
With every instant the tremendous wall of
blackness, as sharply defined as though material, was looming closer before
our whirling ship. While Korus Kan worked frantically with the controls, and
while the cries of our astrounded crew came up to us from beneath, I seized the
distance-phone, in the hope of flashing word at least to others in the galaxy
of the nature of the force that had seized us. But the distance-phone was going
dead, affected by the magnetic force that was drawing us to doom!
170
By then the great cloud was an appalling
sight ahead of us, a vast maw of darkness into which our cruiser was racing at
tremendous velocity. The ship's whirling had subsided somewhat and I yelled to
Korus Kan to make a last trial of its power. He strained the generators to the
breaking-point in the next moment, but it was useless, for nothing could escape
the relentless grip of the power that was drawing us on.
Another
moment and the blackness was walling the firmament
directly before our plunging ship. Something made me turn round at that moment
to glance back toward the galaxy's shining suns as though for a last look, and
then even as I turned round again we were plunged into a darkness to which the
darkest night would have been as noonday, an utter blackness in which no
faintest ray of light existed!
I
groped in the darkness for the switch of the cruiser's inside lights but though
it clicked beneath my fingers there came no answering illumination. Light could
not exist in this terrible region! And the quivering of the cruiser about us
told us that still at immense speed we were being drawn in toward the cosmic cloud's
heart.
On
and on we rushed through that shrouding night, Jhul Din and and Korus Kan and I
bracing ourselves in the pilot room with our hands upon each other's shoulders,
facing ahead as though to look through this utter blackness which no eye could
pierce. I think now that in those terrible moments the three of us were but
waiting in tacit silence for the end. Even were the
cruiser to free itself of the deadly force that gripped it we could never now
win out of this lightless region in which we would wander blindly.
Still
on toward the mighty cloud's heart raced the ship, and to me it seemed that we
must be very near its center. A tense expectation of the end held all of us
now. But abruptly we cried out together as there came
a mounting, hissing sound from outside the cruiser. Our craft was rushing now
through air, through an atmosphere!
At the same moment we were aware that it was
slowing its tremendous speed, that the mighty magnetic
force that had drawn us inward appeared to have vanished. The stunning wonder
of the two things occupied us for the moment
171
to the
exclusion of all else. Was there a world then here at the cosmic cloud's heart,
through whose atmosphere our ship was now moving?
Suddenly
my heart stood still as there came a slight jar against
our cruiser's side, followed by a succession of flopping sounds upon the ship's
top. There was silence for a brief instant while we listened tensely in the
utter darkness of the pilot room, and then came a clang of metal against die
cruiser's top, and the hiss of some strange force.
"It's
some other ship outside!" I cried. "And they're trying to get
in—they're boarding us!"
"The top space-door!" Jhul Din shouted. "They're getting in
there!" For the clang of the door opening came to our ears at that moment
and a flood of cold air from outside rushed through the cruiser.
"Up to the space-door, then!" I yelled. "Hold it against them,
whoever they are!"
As
we cried out we were bursting out of the pilot room, bumping against walls and
doors in the unrelieved darkness, rushing toward the corridor into which that
upper space-door opened. I heard the shouts of the crew as they too blindly
hastened upward, and then as I burst into the corridor I sought I collided
squarely in the darkness with something. Something that was
tall and bulky and that felt like cold flesh to my touch. Instantly two great flap-like limbs or arms from it were grasping
me.
I struck out in the dark with sudden frenzied
horror, but as I knocked the unearthly thing from me others
were about me, pouring down into the corridor from the space-door above, from
outside the ship. They were all about us, in groups, scores, gripping me and
Korus Kan and Jhul Din and all our crew, while we struck out blindly against
them.
I have fought the dread serpent-creatures in
the hall of the living dead, and I have had a part in the tremendous combat of
three universes, but never yet did I take part in a more terrible struggle than
that one. For it was a struggle in a darkness so absolute that we could have no
slightest glimpse of the creatures we fought, knowing by touch only that they
were things such as we had never come into contact with before.
They were calling in flute-like tones to one
another as their powerful flap-arms caught and held us, tones oddly incongruous
with the wild uproar of the battle. They seemed to move as easily in the utter
darkness as we might do in light, and this fact gave them a tremendous advantage
over us. Because of that our wild struggle had in moments been quelled, and as I was held tightly by two of the things I heard the calls of my friends to me and realized that all of us had been
overpowered. These creatures of darkness had captured our shipl
Still
holding us, they herded us toward one end of the corridor, and then released
us. Amazed, I took a step through the darkness toward one of the corridor's
doors. But in an instant I had halted, for through the darkness a buzzing sound
came to me and at the same time fiery, tearing pain ran through every nerve in
my body. I staggered back, and the buzzing ceasing, the pain ended. Jhul Din
and Korus Kan, who had thought to escape also in the darkness, had experienced
the same thing, staggering back with me.
It was evident that our strange captors were
aware in some way of every move we made in the darkness, and that the buzzing
was of some pain-producing weapon of theirs. Later we were to learn that it was
one that set up electrical pain-currents in the nervous system. Pain is but a
sensation or electrical current in a certain nerve, and this strange weapon was
one that by induction set up pain-currents of more or less intensity in every
nerve in the body.
It was evident that we could not escape them
in the darkness, so we remained grouped at the corridor's end. We heard the
flute-like voices of the things calling to one another through the cruiser, and
in a moment or so more came the throbbing of its generators again and the hiss
of air outside as it began to move. In awe we listened.
"What can they be?" whispered Korus
Kan. "Creatures of darkness—creatures of the cosmic cloud who move in its
darkness as though in light!"
"There must be a world here," I
answered, "through whose atmosphere we're moving now. They've come up from
it to capture our ship and must be taking us down to its surface now."
"But a world in this perpetual darkness? How are they able to live—to move?"
"Who
can say? Whatever they are, it is clear that they have pulled the thousands of
the galaxy's ships into the cloud as they did ours, for their own reasons. I
wonder what fate the other ships met."
Minutes passed while the cruiser throbbed
through the darkness; then its speed decreased quickly and with a slight jar
landed upon a solid surface. At once the doors that had been closed were
clanging open again and the flute-voiced creatures of darkness, using their
pain-producing weapons to control us, were herding us out of the corridor and
through the space-door to emerge upon a solid, smooth-paved surface. AH about
us was still darkness absolute but we felt ourselves in open air, on the
surface of a world of unending darkness here at the cosmic cloud's heart.
Our
captors began to march us forward. We moved blindly, controlled by their
touches or pushes. We heard a great babel of flute-voices, of innumerable
creatures coming and going around us. Reaching my hand forth occasionally I
ascertained that we were marching along a series of smooth-walled and
wide-doored buildings. From their doors came sometimes the clash and clang of
machinery operating inside, while in and out of others were swarming hordes of
flute-voiced creatures, their flopping steps sounding all around us.
It was evident that we were being taken
through a city— a city of darkness absolute in which these creatures of darkness
came and went as we of light would do in our own sunlit cities.
I began to understand, though, as we marched
along, how these creatures could move so surely in darkness, and whispered to
Korus Kan and Jhul Din that it was by their sense of hearing that they must do
so, since it seemed to be entirely by the sound of our footsteps that they controlled
and guided us. Yet was it possible that any race of beings could live and flourish
thus and raise their cities in the cosmic cloud's darkness with only hearing to
aid them?
Twice
our captors wheeled our group to right or to left as though following a
definite course through the streets of
174
the
lightless city. In a few moments more, though, when they
touched us with their flap-arms to make us again turn, I misunderstood the
touch and took a step to the right instead of the left. Instantly agony shot
through my every nerve as a buzzing sounded directly beside me. That agony was
so terrible and so unexpected that it made me do what
never else would I have done, whirl around and strike through the darkness at
the thing behind me with all my frenzied strength.
My
clenched fist drove into the cold, bulky body of the thing and I felt it
knocked backward by the blow, heard the buzzing cease and felt the pain stop as
whatever weapon the thing had held rattled upon the paving. Instantly from the
other guards came flute-like cries and the sound of flopping steps rushing toward
me through the darkness. I yielded to the first instinct as I heard them and
threw myself away from them, running blindly through the darkness as their
cries sounded behind me.
There
came scuffling sounds and then the buzz of many of their weapons, and as I heard cries of pain I realized that my friends and crew had attempted to
break loose also but had been halted by their captors. Then after me through
the darkness they were racing with quick, flopping steps.
I ran madly forward, collided with a great
creature and then with another, and as I blundered away from them was aware
that in this world of perpetual darkness I was at a terrible disadvantage in
attempting to escape the creatures of darkness who pursued me. Flute-like
cries were sounding all along the street now, it seemed, a
babel of shouts of alarm spreading quickly over the city. As I blundered
again into a great creature whose flap-arms sought to grasp me I realized that
not for long could I elude them in this darkness to which they were accustomed.
Again I yielded to instinct, and as I felt beside me a wide door I threw
myself through it, crouched motionless just inside it and behind the base of what felt
to my touch like a great metal mechanism.
It
seemed a great room in which I was, for I heard from far along it through the
darkness the humming and clanging of machinery, and also the hurrying steps of
many of the
175
creatures of
darkness as they left their tasks to answer the alarm of cries in the street
outside. Their flapping limbs took them directly past me as they rushed to the
door, and I could have reached out in the darkness and touched them. I made no
move, scarcely daring to breathe; for though I was but a few feet from them, I
felt sure they could become aware of my presence in the darkness only by any
sounds that I might make.
I
heard them answering in their strange voices utterances of the creatures
outside, heard the noise of the alarm gradually receding as those who searched
for me moved along the street. I breathed a little easier for a moment, but
only for a moment. For as the creatures who had rushed to the door streamed
back into the great room two of them halted so close beside me that their
bodies actually brushed slighty against my arm.
Motionless as a statue I crouched there in
the darkness, as the two conversed in their fluting voices beside me. Were they
to move a fraction of an inch nearer they must discover me. Were the slightest
sound to come from me my discovery was certain.
At
last, after what seemed an eternity of waiting, though if could have been
really no more than a few moments, the two passed on, and a kindly providence
kept them from brushing nearer me as they went. Soon the activities of the
great hall seemed resumed, the humming of its mechanisms coming to me again
through the darkness, and the sound of the creatures among them moving from one
to another.
The peril of immediate discovery seemed past,
but how could I hope to escape for long in this city, this world, of eternal
darkness? I could not move through it as the creatures that inhabited it did,
as surely as though in day; and to stumble blindly through its streets meant
swift discovery. How could I hope to find Korus Kan and Jhul Din and the others
in this strange world of which I could see nothing? It seemed that by escaping
for a while as I had done from our captors I was but prolonging an agony of
spirit that might otherwise have been cut short, at least, by death.
In this desperate situation
I strove to order my thoughts. 176
It
was apparent that to remain where I was would be useless, since though I might
escape discovery for a short time it would inevitably come. It would be better
to make an effort at least, to find the others and the cruiser, even though
such an effort would be stamped from the first as hopeless. To attempt to pass
through the streets of this city seemed insane, yet to do so held the one
slender chance of finding the others; so I summoned all my courage and crept
out through die wide door and into the smooth-paved street outside.
There,
pausing helplessly in the darkness, I listened intently. From all along the
street came the flopping steps of the creatures moving
this way or that. It seemed to me that it was along the edges of the street
that fewest of the creatures moved; so, hugging the smooth walls of the buildings,
I began to creep forward.
As flopping steps approached me though the darkness ahead I
halted, for I knew that the sound of my own steps would betray me to the keen
hearing of these creatures. In a moment the approaching creature had passed me
and again I took up my careful progress forward. Again I halted as there came other steps near me. Slowly I made my way along the
street, crouching motionless whenever any of the creatures neared me, praying
that they might not collide with me. Blindly I felt my way forward through this
city of awful night.
At last I felt myself at the street's end,
with no more of the smooth-walled buildings beside me. I seemed emerging into a
great open space, across which came a tremendous bustle of activity. I moved
out a little into it, crouching every few instants as
flopping steps came and went about me, until I struck something like a great
smoothly curving wall of metal before me. For an instant I felt of it and then
was motionless in amazement, for it took but that instant for me to recognize
what was before me. It was a great interstellar ship, like those that plied
the galaxy in countless thousands, and like those that had been drawn into
this cosmic cloud in thousands!
For a moment astonishment held me to the
exclusion of all else. That this before me was one of the thousands of ships
that had been drawn into the cloud I could not doubt.
177
Had all then been captured like our own by these creatures^ of darkness? What could it mean?
I
was aware that a tremendous activity was going on far around and before me, and
as I made my way cautiously through the darkness along the hull of the ship I
heard a stream of creatures pouring in and out of its space-doors, busy carrying
in things of metal that clanked against the doors as they went through them.
Avoiding them, I moved to the side and in moments had come to another great
interstellar ship that was the center of a similar scene of activity. Evidently
there were a great number of them in the open space before me, and as evidently
they were being prepared and fitted by these creatures of darkness for some
great enterprise. But that enterprise—what could it be?
I
stifled the wonder and amazement that were strong in me, though, for I realized
that this swarming place was one of the most dangerous I could encounter. It
was inevitable that some of the creatures would collide with me in the darkness
if I stayed there long, so reluctantly I crept back toward the street from
which I had emerged.
It
did not seem that street which I entered again, though, but a narrower one.
There were in it fewer of the city's creatures than in the other street, though
I heard still the flopping steps of many of them hastening to and from the open
space and interstellar ships which I had just left. I started along it, blindly
and aimlessly, not knowing whether I was going back in the direction from which
I had come, and not caring greatly. For by that time it seemed clear to me that
I was destined to wander blindly through the darkness of the city until
discovered and captured, so slender seemed any hope that remained to me.
Still I observed all caution, crouching low
each time the sound of approaching creatures came to my ears, not moving until
they had passed. Once as I flattened myself thus the flap-like limb or foot of
the passing thing actually touched my hand, so close did it come to me, but as
I did not move the thing passed on.
After feeling through the darkness along this
street for perhaps a thousand yards, my greatest worry being to avoid the
creatures who emerged suddenly now and then from the doors along it, I was
aware of a still narrower
178
street
that branched from it. I took this way, and soon realized that in this narrower
way were few of the darkness creatures, they taking the broader streets that
crossed the city. I met but one or two of the things in several thousand feet
of progress along the street, and though it was harder to elude them in the
narrower way I began to feel more confidence. It was that confidence that undid
me, for as I passed the door of a building without my usual precautions there
emerged suddenly from it one of the great creatures who collided squarely with
me.
For
an instant the thing must have been even more surprized than I was, and before
it could realize what had happened I had flung myself upon it, for well I
realized that flight would not serve me now.
My
hands sought in vain for a hold upon the smooth, cold body, even as its own
great flap-like arms wrapped themselves around me. The thing seemed to have no
head or neck whatever, and was almost featureless also. But by the merest
chance my hands in that first instant fell upon a narrow aperture in the cold
flesh of the upper part of the body. Instantly I closed my hand over it, and as
a strangled flute-cry came from it I realized that I had found the monster's
mouth. Holding tightly to it and encircling its great body with my other arm I
wrestled wildly with it there in the darkness of the narrow street as it sought
to shake me off.
The strength of its flap-arms was tremendous,
but they were impeded by the fact that I had partly pinned them against its
body. Yet it was whirling me diis way and that with tremendous force, against
the walls and paving of the street.
Nothing
but choking sounds came from it, though, and I realized that the creature was
air-breathing even as I was and that my hold upon its mouth-aperture was
throttling it. Desperately I clung to retain the hold, and with a strength as desperate the great thing tried to tear me
loose. I knew that a single cry would bring a swarm of the things to the aid of
this one, and the knowledge steeled my muscles. The wild threshing of the
creature seemed rapidly lessening, and in moments more my strangling hold had
done its work and with a few convulsive jerks the monster went limp and dead.
I straightened from it, panting, then froze with renewed terror. Along the narrow street
other steps were approaching me, somewhat lighter steps that were moving
carefully as though in investigation, halting now and then. As they came level
with me they halted again, and I held my breath. But in the next instant came
the sound of the steps coming straight toward me!
With
something like a cry of despair on my lips I threw myself
forward at the approaching one through the darkness. I knew myself discovered,
expected, even as I leaped, the flute-like cry that would bring the hordes in
the neighboring streets upon me. But to my utter amazement, my hands grasped
not another cold and bulky-bodied creature of darkness but a tall, erect
man-like form that was making no resistance to me! I felt short, flat bat-like
wings behind that body, felt a man-like head with big-beaked countenance, and
then felt two muscular arms grasping my shoulders while a voice whispered
tensely in my ear in the tongue of the galaxy.
"Quiet!" it whispered.
"Another sound will bring them here from the other street!"
"You—"
I stammered. "You're from the galaxy outside— you speak its tongue—but how
in this darkness—"
"Not now!" the other warned.
"I'll explain in a moment, but now we've got to get out of this street and
get this dead thing out before it's discovered. Here—this way—"
Moving
through the rayless opacity as a man in a dream
might move, I felt myself guided by the other back to the body of the thing I
had slain. We lifted it between us and my companion went a little along the
street until he turned into a narrow aperture between two smooth-walled
structures. Into this we cast the bulky body, and then crouched down together
by it. The other had moved through the darkness as easily as through light, I
had found, and my first whispered words as we crouched together were of his
ability to do so.
"Here,"
he answered, "these disks—upon your eyes—" As he spoke he was taking
from somewhere on his person two flat little disks an inch or so across, one
of which he fastened upon each of my eyes by means of vacuum-sucked rims. I
uttered an involuntary cry of astonishment;
180
for
as I looked through those disks of glass, the utter darkness that had been
about me since first we had been drawn into the great cloud gave way instantly
to a pulsing violet light that illumined all things around me.
I
could see clearly the towering walls of the two buildings between which we
crouched, the narrow street outside in which I had had my battle,
and my companion also. He was, I saw, in truth a tall bat-winged figure with
strong beaked face and intelligent dark eyes, and I recognized him at once as
one of the bat-folks who inhabit the worlds of the sun Deneb. Deneb! Thought of
it brought flashing back to my mind a thing that the Chief had told us before
our start, and I seized my companion's arm.
"Zat
Zanat!" I cried. "You're Zat Zanat, the scientist of Deneb who went
into the cloud years ago to explore it!"
He
nodded. "I am Zat Zanat," he acknowledged, "and years it has
been, in truth, since I came into this cosmic cloud, this place of darkness and
horror unutterable."
"But it's not darkness to you!" I
exclaimed, pointing to the two disks which he wore before his own eyes.
"With these you can see in this absolute blackness—though I don't know
how."
"I can tell you that soon enough," he said, "but you— how comes it that you were roaming
this city of the creatures of darkness?"
Swiftly
I explained to him how we had been sent to investigate the drawing in of
thousands of the galaxy's ships into the cloud, and how having been drawn into
it ourselves we had been captured and brought to this city where I had made my
escape. He listened intently, nodding once or twice, and when I had finished
asked a question.
"You wandered into one of the great
masses of captured interstellar ships they are preparing. But did you guess why
they drew those ships into the cloud, for what they are preparing them?"
At my negative his expression grew solemn.
"They are preparing those thousands of captured ships, Dur Nal," he
said, "for an enterprise that means horror to our galaxy: they are preparing
to burst out of the cosmio cloud upon the galaxy in all their numbers and seize
our suns and worlds in a conquest of darkness!"
"Of
darkness?" I
repeated, and he nodded.
"Within
hours they leave this world and the cosmic cloud, to pour out into the galaxy,
for even as we talk here their great plans are coming to their climax—plans that I have seen them form and carry out in the years I have been here.
"For
it is years I have spent on this world of darkness in the great cloud. You have
heard how years ago I, Zan Zanat, resolved to do what none ever had done, to
explore the cosmic cloud's interior. I knew that light could not exist in it,
for its darkness is formed by the meeting of ether-currents which generate
etheric vibrations of a frequency that neutralizes all light-vibrations.
"It
was my plan to see in the darkness of the cloud by the vibrations beyond light,
the ultra-violet vibrations. They were not neutralized, not affected, and I
devised certain ray-filter disks or glasses that made the eyes sensitive to
the ultra-violet vibrations, and thus showed all things in violet light, since
the ultra-violet rays have the same sources as light-rays.
"Equipped
with these glasses I and my assistants ventured into the cosmic cloud in our
cruiser. Its interior lay in violet light before us, and after cruising in near
its center we descried a small planet that hung motionless in it. We landed to
explore it and found it inhabited by strange eyeless creatures of darkness who had evolved on it in the ages and who, because they had
evolved in utter darkness had no eyes at all but had a hearing so marvelously
keen that it served them instead.
"Hardly had we landed on this world when
the creatures captured us. They took us before their rulers, who examined us.
These eyeless creatures had never imagined that other worlds might he outside
the cloud, nor had they any space-ships. But learning that there were many
worlds outside, they began to plan how they might pour out and seize them, for
their numbers were cramped on this small world.
"My assistants they slew, but kept me,
torturing me with the pain-producing weapons to gain information from me. They
saw that they would need thousands of great ships
182
to
enable them to pour out on the galaxy, and had not the means of making them
soon. They devised, therefore, a way of drawing in the numbers of ships they
needed from those coming and going in the galaxy around the cloud.
"This
was to increase many times the magnetism of their world. Every world in space
is a great magnet with north and south poles, as you know, and they planned to
increase the magnetic power of their world thousands of times by a means they
knew, which involved the simultaneous electrical charging of both their
world's poles.
"They prepared the apparatus at the
poles and placed the control of it on the top of the great building of their
riders. When that control was closed the magnetism of this world at the cloud's
heart was suddenly intensified thousands of times. Its tremendous power reached
out through the cloud and caught great swarms of the interstellar ships passing
outside, and drew them swiftly in.
"Had they left the control closed their
world would have drawn in those ships to smash in annihilation against it, but
just after the helpless ships were drawn into their world's atmosphere the
control was opened and the magnetic grip released. Then while the swarms of
ships, helpless in the darkness, were in their atmosphere, their own ships
they had constructed in small numbers and which they could operate in space by
means of reflected electrical-sound vibrations instead of sight—in these ships
they went up and boarded and captured the helpless vessels.
"They brought them down to this world's
surface, those inside them helpless in the darkness against these people of
darkness. Almost all inside the captured ships they slew with the
pain-producers, but a few who they thought would be useful to them they saved
and prisoned as I was prisoned in the building of the rulers.
"Soon afterward they repeated this
process, closing the control and drawing in new swarms of ships from outside
the cloud. And again they did the same thing and with the same result. The
fourth time they captured but one ship, your own, but this can have made no
difference to them, for their first three operations had brought them in
thousands of great interstellar ships in which all the eyeless hordes could be
contained.
"Already they had almost completed the
refitting of these ships, fitting them with their vibration-guiding devices,
and also with the mechanisms they will take with them for their conquest of the
galaxy. These are mechanisms each of which can destroy all light for a vast
space around it by neutralizing the light-vibrations even as is done by neutral
forces here in the cloud.
"And
with these they will conquer the galaxy inevitably. For they need but settle
upon a world and with their mechanisms or one of them destroy all light in and
around it. Plunged in absolute darkness, its blind peoples will be unable to
strike back at the eyeless creatures who, used to darkness and at home in it,
can wipe out the others at their leisure with the pain-producers.
"Already
their last preparations are being finished, already their hordes streaming
toward the waiting masses of interstellar ships. It was that knowledge that
made me desperate, and in desperation I managed to escape from the building of
the rulers that was my prison. I have kept always with me the ultra-violet
sight-glasses, and with a pair of them was able to elude the creatures, hoping
to steal a cruiser and get out to the galaxy to warn it. But I could not get
near any of the ships, and in going through the city in a vain hope of doing so
I saw you battling with and killing that creature and came to you."
When Zat Zanat had finished his strange tale,
I was silent for a moment, gazing out into the narrow violet-lit street beside
which we crouched.
"You think then that the only hope is to
steal a cruiser and get out of the cloud to warn the galaxy before the attack
comes?" I asked.
He nodded quickly. "What other hope is
there? Nothing -can halt this invasion of theirs, for before an hour more is
past, it may well be, their hordes will be pouring out of the cloud in their
cruisers. You can hear them making ready now."
"But what of my friends? I can't escape and leave Jhul Din and Korus
Kan here, or the others either."
He thought for a moment. "For your
cruiser's crew there is no hope," he said, "for the rulers would
order them slain
184
at
once. If your two friends seemed of any importance, though, there is a chance
that they would have been let live for a while, prisoned there in the ruler's
building."
"Then
it's for us to get them out," I said, and he laughed shortly.
"That's
all," he agreed. "Well, one thing seems hardly more hopeless than
another, and we may as well try it. But we must get your friends soon if ever, for
these creatures of darkness will surely kill their prisoners to the last one
before they leave."
We
stood up, then ventured cautiously into the narrow
street. Looking along its violet-lit length I could see in the broader street
that crossed it innumerable dark shapes hastening this way and that. The
buildings on each side of the streets were tall rectangular ones a few hundred
feet in height, their walls smooth and black like the paving of the streets.
They had doors but no windows whatever, seeming like great boxes. It was with
an effort that I remembered that in unending darkness there was small need for
windows.
Zat Zanat pointed out over the city to a
great block-like building that towered above all others, and on whose top I
could make out the shapes of resting space-ships.
"The building of the rulers," he
whispered. "It's there your friends are, if they still live."
"Lead
on, then," I said, and without further words we started down the narrow
way.
As we came toward the broader avenue that
crossed it we went more carefully, and it was here that I had my first real
glimpse of the creatures of darkness with whom I had struggled and from whom
and among whom I had fled. They were much as my touching hands had informed me,
great upright bodies of dark flesh moving on two flaplike lower limbs and with
two similar arms. In the upper part of the body the only features were the
small opening of the mouth and great cup-like ears set on each side of it.
As I watched, with something of a recurrence
of my former horror, I saw that the creatures seemed to judge all their
movements by hearing, avoiding one another when they heard the sound of steps,
and avoiding walls and other obstacles evidently by listening to the echo of
their
185
own
steps. The product of evolution in the unending dark- j ness of the cosmic cloud, hearing meant to them all that j sight could mean to children of light.
Zat Zanat, making a sign of caution to me,
stepped for- I
ward and led the way across
the border street, at a time i
when the stream of eyeless creatures had lessened. As we
approached its other side, though, the approach of two of
the monsters bearing a section of machinery between them
forced us to halt lest our steps be heard. The two passed but
inches from us, and unutterably strange and terrifying it
was to stand silent there in the violet-lit street with those
creatures flopping past. It took an effort to remember that
when we made no sound they could not perceive us. .
As
we moved on I glanced ahead and back and saw that / over all the city as far as
the eye could reach, in the violet \ light which was in reality not light,
streams of the creatures were pouring toward great square open spaces in the
city j where rested the thousands of captured interstellar ships. The last
pieces of mechanism were being loaded into these, it seemed, and the monsters
themselves were pouring into them. They were on the point of making their start
out through the cloud to fall upon the galaxy's worlds!
The
sight spurred us forward. Halting now and then and freezing motionless as
statues to allow some of the darkness creatures to pass around or near us, we
made our way through the streets until we were nearing the great building of
the rulers. By then the greater part of the city's hordes had poured toward and
into the massed interstellar ships, and because of that we went forward more
quickly.
Zat
Zanat turned now and then to whisper caution, though, and the third time that
he did so I saw his eyes widen suddenly in terror behind his glasses, saw him
racing back toward me with arms outstretched. With swift sense of panic I made
to whirl around but before I could do so two great flap-arms had closed on me
from behind, and in grasping my head knocked loose the glasses from my eyes.
Instantly
I was plunged into the most profound darkness, and then as there came a rush of
feet was released by the creature that had held me and sent staggering off into
the darkness. I heard a terrific struggle going on in the darkness
186
beside me,
knew that Zat Zanat and the monster were locked in death-grips, but was
helpless to aid my friend in the blindness that was upon me.
Rushing
toward the sound of battle I was knocked back and down by a great blow that
caught my face. I pawed frantically along the street in search of the glasses I
had lost, heard over the scuffle in the dark the sound of Zat Zanat's gasps for
breath and a smothered flute-like cry from his antagonist.
Abruptly
the sounds of struggle ceased, and somewhere in the darkness a heavy weight
thudded against the paving. Which of the two had won? I waited statue-like for
the answer until I was grasped by the shoulders, and whirled around in sudden
terror. But as I did so a hand was again pressing the eye-disks against my eyes
and as the whole scene sprang from deep darkness into violet light once more I
saw that it was Zat Zanat, disheveled and panting for breath, and that the
other lay dead upon the paving.
"On to the building!" Zat Zanat gasped. "We've but minutes
left, I think!"
We
sprang forward, running now along the street, for along its whole length we
could see none of the eyeless monsters, and were aware with sinking hearts that
all or almost all must be already in the waiting ships. Minutes more would see
them pouring out of the cloud to spread darkness and doom over the galaxy!
Down the street we ran, careless now of any
that might hear, until there loomed at its end before and above us the vast
box-like building of the rulers. None of the creatures of darkness could be
seen around it, and we sprang toward the great square open door, then halted for an instant despite ourselves.
Far away across the city was sounding a
humming as of a gigantic swarm of bees. It was a sound that I knew well and one
that drove the blood from my heart. It was the sound of the generators of great
space-ships throbbing, and as it sounded there was lifting over the city a mass
of hundreds of the gleaming ships!
Away to our right another mass of equal size
was rising, and far behind us in the strange city another, and still odiers at
a greater distance from us, thousands of huge
187
interstellar ships loaded with all the eyeless hordes! They were starting out from
their world and from the cloud on their career of dread conquest!
"They're
starting!" I cred to Zat Zanat. "We're too
late!" "Not yet!" he cried. "Look, there's still a ship
waiting on the roof! They must be slaying their prisoners now!"
For
on the roof of the great building before us we glimpsed a waiting cruiser that
had not yet risen. The significance of it and of Zat
Zanat's cry drove home to my brain at the same instant. It was waiting for
those in the building, those who were killing the prisoners they had kept
there. And Jhul Din and Korus Kan—!
I
uttered a cry of rage, leapt forward and through the door with Zat Zanat close
behind me. I vaguely glimpsed great halls through which we raced, queer seats
and desks and instruments, and then with my companion beside me was leaping up
the broad flight of curving steps ahead.
Up
it and up another stair we raced, and then my face blanched and I threw myself
on at greater speed as from somewhere in the great building over us came shriek
on shriek of the most dreadful agony, ending in each case in quick silence but
taken up at once by other voices.
"The pain-producers!" Zat Zanat sobbed. "They're slaying the
prisoners with them!"
"Jhul Din! Korus Kan!" I cried,
madly, and then cried out again as there came to me from above somewhere a
faint answering shout. We rushed up into the next level, along a broad
corridor, and halted before a solid door from behind which came the cries of my
friends.
I
threw myself frantically at the door but the secret of its lock defied me, and
it was diamond-hard in material. Other shrieks came now from the floor above
us, and then as they ended came the flopping steps of the eyeless creatures coming
down the stair to finish these their last prisoners.
Zat Zanat jerked me swiftly aside from the
door. "Wait!" he commanded, and as I understood his purpose I froze
instantly silent and motionless with him.
Down
the stair and into the corridor came a half-dozen great eyeless monsters who carried with them funnel-like instruments of metal that
I knew were the pain-producers. Their flute-voices sounded as they hastened
along the hall
188
toward the
door by which we stood. We saw one finger with his
flap-hands the mechanism on the door, and then as it swung open two had raised
their funnel-like weapons toward the two inside. But it was then that Zat Zanat
and I leaped.
A
wild chorus of flute-cries went up as we crashed into them, and two sprawled
motionless beneath our striking arms before the others could comprehend what
was happening. And at the same moment there rushed through the open door Korus
Kan and Jhul Din, the Antarian's powerful arms striking right and left and Jhul
Din's great voice booming in rage as he laid about him.
Both
Korus Kan and Jhul Din, though, were fighting in darkness absolute, not having
the ultra-violet light disks that enabled Zat Zanat and me to see, and though
five of the eyeless monsters had gone down in the first frenzied moment of the
battle the others were turning with incredible speed, perceiving all our
movements by hearing, to strike back at us.
In a moment Korus Kan was down, drawing
another of the eyeless things with him. Jhul Din had blindly gripped two of
them with his immense arms. Before either Zat Zanat or I could throw ourselves upon the remaining creature, though, he had leaped
back from the battle and had raised his funnel-like weapon. A buzzing sound
came from it and instantly through all of us in every nerve seared a white-hot
agony that seemed to rive our brains asunder.
I
was staggering against, the wall in that awful torture, and Korus Kan and Jhul
Din, though they had killed their opponents, were writhing in agony. I saw the
creature holding the weapon coming closer toward us with it, knew that an
instant more of that agony meant the death they had dealt their prisoners. But
at that moment there took place before my eyes one of the bravest things that
ever was looked upon.
Zat
Zanat had been nearest the creature when it had turned its weapon on us, and
had staggered in that awful agony as we had, but as the thing came closer he
straightened as with a terrible effort, summoned by a supreme command of his
reeling brain all the power of his tortured mus-
189
cles,
and bounded forward in a single agonized leap that sent him crashing against
the monster.
As
he struck the creature its weapon was knocked from its grasp, and as the pain
that was killing us abruptly ceased we rushed to where the two struggled and in
a moment the creature lay dead with the others. We staggered up unsteadily,
Zat Zanat handing from his belt pouch ultra-violet glasses to my two friends.
"To the roof!" he
cried.
"The roof—that cruiser on it is our one
chance to get out of the cloud and warn the galaxy before the attack
comes!"
Even as we cried out that, we were bounding
up the curving stairs from floor to floor until in a moment more we were
bursting out into the broad flat roof of the great building. In a single glance
we took in the whole scene. At the roof's center rose a square block that was
the center of innumerable branching electrical connections and that bore upon
it a great lever-switch or control now open, the control Zat Zanat had
described which made of this world a colossal-powered magnet when closed. To
one side of the roof rested a long cruiser with no occupants, the ship that had
been awaiting the half-dozen creatures who had tarried
to slay the prisoners.
But as we burst out into the roof's violet
light it was not at these things we were looking but at what was around and
above us. The whole city, the whole world around us, were
deserted! High above us we made out a tremendous swarm of black spots, which
were rapidly diminishing in size as they moved away. They were the thousands of interstellar
ships and they were going forth with all the eyeless hordes inside them to the
conquest of the galaxy!
"They've
started—started out of the cloud! We're too late!"
"Too late!"
The words seemed like tocsins of doom in our
ears as we stood there motionless, Jhul Din and Korus Kan and Zat Zanat and I,
gazing at the vast armada going out to spread death and destruction across our
universe. Never could the galaxy's peoples of light stand against those dread
peoples of darkness who would spread darkness before them. Never could we
outdistance them even to warn the galaxy of the
190
coming
attack. As though petrified we stared after those receding swarms of ships. Too
late!
Abruptly
our dazed brains became conscious of a strange sound beside us. Zat Zanat was
laughing. High and mirthless and hysterical laughter it was; half choking and
with his whole body trembling he reeled sidewise across the roof toward the
great block at its center. And in the next moment, with the same strange high
laughter upon his hps, he had reached up to the big control-switch on the block
and with a single motion had closed it, a deep throbbing coming from beneath
somewhere as he did so.
We
stared at Zat Zanat in frozen silence, saw him swaying toward us, saw him pointing upward with face suddenly twisted, intense.
We looked up. The great swarms of diminishing black dots that were the
space-ships were still above but they were receding no longer! They seemed
growing larger! Something, memory or thought, crashed like thunder through my
brain. The control that Zat Zanat had closed! The control that made of this
world a magnet of colossal power, and that the creatures of darkness had used
to draw into the cloud those thousands of ships! And it was closed now!
"The
ships1" Jhul
Din cried madly. "They're
being drawn back to this world!"
"Drawn back—and
they're crashing—crashing!"
For
we but glimpsed the thousands of mighty ships growing greater above us with
terrific speed, whirling back broadside in utter confusion and broken masses,
when with a prolonged roar of thundering crashes they were smashing into the
surface of the mighty magnet-world that had drawn them back! The planet's
surface shook and rolled beneath the gigantic simultaneous concussion of those
vast swarms of vessels that it had drawn back with awful force toward it, and
as we were flung from our feet the world seemed riven by the vast metal masses
crashing at terrible speed into it, none striking the roof on which we were
only by grace of the fact that none had been directly over us.
For a terrible moment the giant thunder-roll
of the crashing ships split the air about us, and then as it lessened, the
swaying of the building beneath us subsided and we staggered to our feet.
Around us lay a world of annihilation and
death, its surface, save for an unharmed building here and there like our own,
but one vast plain of wreckage! The wreckage of the thousands of ships that
would have spread horror and death over all the
galaxy; die wreckage that held the dead and broken hordes of all the eyeless
creatures; the wreckage that marked the annihilation of their race and of all
their tremendous plans! And that annihilation had been brought on them at the
last by their own work, by the control that made of their world a colossal
magnet to draw all ships toward it. They had used it to draw the galaxy's ships
into the cloud, into their world's atmosphere to be captured, but at the last
it had been used to draw those ships with all their hordes inside them back to
this world, to crash into it and into annihilation!
For moments Jhul Din and Korus Kan and Zat
Zanat and I stared at that scene of terrific death, and then, flinging open
the great magnet-control again, we were climbing into the waiting cruiser,
slamming its space-door shut. As we gained its pilot room I grasped the wheel
and controls, and as the generators throbbed beneath my touch I shot the ship
upward from that world of awful death and into the violet glow over it, heading
at mounting speed out and toward the violet light-points that were the galaxy's
stars. The glasses fell from our tired eyes as we swayed there, and again the
absolute darkness of the great cloud was upon us; but I did not stop to replace
them but held the racing cruiser steady on its course at a speed terrific.
Out
through the darkness of the cloud we were rushing almost in moments, so great
was our speed; for soon we shot abruptly out of its stygian lightlessness into
clear space once more, into clear view of the galaxy's familiar stars. Even
then, though, I did not slow our racing ship, but with Jhul Din and Korus Kan
and Zat Zanat slumped beside me kept the cruiser racing straight
onward—straight away from the vast blackness diminishing in the heavens behind
us, straight away from the cosmic cloud which its people of darkness had
thought to leave but which would hold them now in silence and in death forever.
[RUSHinC
suns
From mighty Canopus, capital of the
Federated Stars, to the outer
fringes of our great gaiaxy, the
Interstellar Patrol was on the watch.
Rogue suns, marauding alien intelligences, man-made comets driven by
their makers for the
conquest of unsuspecting worlds, diabolical
conspiracies hatched in the depths of
unmapped nebulas—it was the business of
the Patrol's
mighty spaceships to guard against
such cosmic
dangers.
CRASHING SUNS is the epic account
of this future space legion, where
volunteers from a thousand
worlds man the mighty starcraft of a hundred thousand
years to come. It's interplanetary adventure on the classic
scale, by the master hand
of Edmond
Hamilton.